Chevrolet - Corvette - Owners Manual - 2003 - 2003

The 2003 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Safety Belts .............................................. 1-7 ....................................... 1-21 Child Restraints Air Bag System ....................................... 1-39 ............................ 1-48 Restraint System Check Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Keys ........................................................ 2-3 ....................................... 2-9 Doors and Locks 2-14 Windows ................................................. ............................ 2-16 Theft-DeterrentSystems ........... 2-19 StartingandOperatingYour Vehicle 2-37 Mirrors .................................................... ......................................... 2-39 Storage Areas .............................................. 2-43 Roof Panel ....................................... 2-49 Convertible Top \Inhinln pnrcnnc~li~latinn 7-55 v . .. .......................... Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 InstrumentPanelOverview .......................... 3-2 ...................................... 3-22 Climate Controls WarningLights,Gages and Indicators ......... 3-29 DriverInformationCenter (DIC) .................. 3-44 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-62 b l l l" t u "I "V I C A . 1 L U L I . I Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 ..... 4-2 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ................................................... 4-33 Towing Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 Service ..................................................... 5-3 5-5 Fuel ......................................................... Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10 ............................................... 5-46 Rear Axle 5-47 Bulb Replacement .................................... ......... 5-52 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement -. I Ires ...................................................... 5-54 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-75 5-83 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-84 Electrical System ...................................... 5-92 Capacities and Specifications ..................... Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-94 lbM-in+nn-nnn Cehnrllnln ..................... 6-1 mwmumn o u r Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1 Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2 Index ........................................ IC'CI . YP Y Y . .--I.- Canadian Owners You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your dealer or from: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name CORVETTE and the CORVETTE Emblem are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you -ever need it when you’re on the road. I f you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it. Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 10323873 A First Edition How to Use This Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things. Index A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. @Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/20/02 All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,’’ “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.” You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. I In the caution area, we teli you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage or indicator Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. A notice will tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. iv If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component, gage or indicator reference the following topics in the Index: “Engine CompartmentOverview” “Instrument Panel Overview” “Climate Controls” “Audio Systems” Also see Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators on page 3-29. These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle: A ~ CAUTION POSSIBLE OCCUPANT PROTECT INJURY LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO DONOTTWISTSAFETY BELT WHENAnACHING $ SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY % ACIDcoULD CAUSE BURNS SPARKS OR FLAMES FAEXST AIRBAG BELTS MOVE SEAT FULLY \$% REARWARD* SECURE CHILD SEAT /7 COMPLETELY THEN SECURE CHILD SEAT WINDOW a, - ILIGHTING MASTER 0 op p \ PARKING LAMPS DO NOT INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION k l 1 ENGINE COOLANT SWITCH \ TEMP TURN SIGNALS pf BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM cI. ACCESS ENGINE COOLANT FAN I' DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION SPARK OR EXPLODE BAlTERY 48:@ . r r l 1 COOLANT OWNERS MANUAL ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SERVICE l.f,l Model Reference This manual covers these models: I 1 Convertible 206 I Coupe Section Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ..................................................... -1-2 Manual Seats ................................................ 1-2 Power Seats ................................................. -1-2 Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-3 Seatback Latches ........................................... 1-5 Sport Seat ..................................................... 1-6 Safety Belts ..................................................... 1-7 Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-7 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................. 1-12 Driver Position .............................................. 1-13 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20 Passenger Position ....................................... 1-20 Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1-20 Child Restraints ............................................ -1-21 Older Children .............................................. 1-21 Infants and Young Children ............................ 1.23 Child Restr3.int Systems ................................. 1-26 Top Strap .......................... ...................1-30 Top Strap Anchor Location ... ............... 1.31 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-31 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ......................................... 1-33 Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat Position ............................................ 1-34 Air Bag System .............................................. 1-39 Where Are the Air Bags? ............................... 1-40 When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-42 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-42 How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... .1..42 'What Wiil You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ....................................... 1-43 Air Bag Off Switch ........................................ 1-44 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-47 Restraint System Check .................................. 1-48 Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-48 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ...................................................... 1-48 1-1 Front Seats Power Seats Manual Seats If your vehicle has this feature, the control for the power seats will be located on the outboard side of each seat, near the base. To move a manual seat, pull up on the lever located in front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever. Then try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place. 1-2 Different parts of the power seat control move different parts of the seat. To move the seat forward or rearward, move the control in that direction. Move the control up to raise the seat and down to lower it. By tilting the back of the control, it will raise or lower the back of the seat. Tilting the front of the control will raise or lower the front of the seat. Reclining Seatbacks Your preferred seat position can be stored and recalled if you have the memory option. See Memory on page 2-55. The lever for the reclining seatback is located on the outboard side of each seat, near the base. To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your :.;eight zff the sn2fhxk. PL!!! completely 11p on the lever until it stops, and lean back to position the seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback into place. 1-3 Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulder belt can’t do its job becauseit won’t be against your body. Instead,it will be in front ofyou. In a crash you couldgo into it, receiving neck or other injuries. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. 1-4 The lap belt can’t do its jobeither. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in theseat and wear your safety belt properly. Seatback Latches If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to the rear area. To fold a seatback forward, lift this latch, which is located on top of the backside of the seat, and ~ c !!he ! seathack forward Tho seatback will lock down in this position. To unlock, lift up on the latch and push the seatback rearward. When you return the seatback to its original position, make sure the seatback is locked in place. Sport Seat If your vehicle has this feature, there are three other controls that help you change the shape of the seat in addition to the power seat control. There are two lumbar supports for the middle(A) and lower (6) back. There’s also a side bolster control (C) that adjusts the sides of the seat around you to give you more lateral support. For lumbar support, move each control (A) and (B) forward to inflate or rearward to deflate. Move the side bolster control (C) up for more side support and down for less support. 1 -6 Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety beat properly, If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, you might not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger’s beltis fastened properly too. It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-3 1. 1-7 In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. Why Safety Belts Work You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. it goes. YOU ride in or on anything, you go as fast as A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. 1-8 a, a, u a R The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 1-10 or the instrument panel... Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. YOU get more rime io siup. ‘iou siup Uvec KXZ. disianzz, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense. A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; SO they work with safety belts - not Instead ot tnem. Every air bay system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, h t especially ir, side 2nd ether collisions. 1-1 I 5 0 Y 0 3 3 s E. rc (D .E 0 CD -a s 3 .<" 9, v) -l 9, 8 Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see how, see Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-3. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. See ”Lap Belt Cinch Feature” later in this section. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-20. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-13 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. Lap Belt Cinch Feature If you do not want the lap belt to move freely, pull the lap belt out all the way to set the lock. To permit the lap belt to move freely again, unbuckle the belt, let it retract all the way, and buckle up again. 1-14 Q: What’s wrong with this? You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder ,It is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-15 Q: What’s wrong with this? You can be seriol y i I , Ired if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-16 I Q: What’s wrong with this? You can be serious injured if yoIU wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move toofar forward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. I L A! ~. -. The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-17 Q: What’s wrong with this? You ea seriouslyinjured b z - tw.-_ed belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-18 1-19 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Passenger Position The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt. See Driver Position on page 1-13. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, should use it. YOU But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. 1-20 Child Restraints Older Children Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly. Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. 1-21 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the childis so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured.A belt must be used by only one person at a time. 1-22 this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. . . Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder partis behind the child. If the child wears the beltin CAUTION: (Continued) Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint. 1-23 example, In a crasn ar c 25 mpn (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint. F I People should neverhold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. -- CAUTION: (Continued) I 1-24 Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? 4: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. if it is, the restraint wiil have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition. tnere are many kinds o i resirairiis d v & i & k kx children with special needs. an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the e strongest part of an ck and shoulders. Infants a!ways should be secured in appropriate infant 1-25 Child Restraint Systems The body s t r u c L e of a young child is ,Ate unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip bones arestill so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that’s unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle. 1-26 A rear-facing infant seat (6) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The h2.rnqss system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. 1-27 Q: How do child restraints work? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. 1-28 use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. For many years, add-on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraintto help reduce the chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are hpodtantj so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. The child restraint must be secured properly in the passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s air bag. See Air Bag OffSwitch on page 1-44 and Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenaer Seat Position on page 7-34for more on this, including important safety information. I A child in a rear-facing child resilaint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear-facing child restraint in the passenger seat position. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a coilision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it. 1-29 Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored properly. If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof panel, don’t use a child restraint that requires a top strap in your vehicle because the strap cannot be anchored properly. 1-30 Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say. Top Strap Anchor Location If your vehicle is a Z06, an anchor bracket for a top strap is located behind the passengers’s seat in the cargo area. Anchor the top strap to the bracket. Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find anchors (A) in the passenger seat. To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system, a label will be applied to the seatback at each anchor position. The labels are located near the base of the passenger seat. 1-31 In order to use the system, you need either a forward-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B), as shown here. With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint. 1-32 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be able to protect a child sitting there.In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety beltsto secure the restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing a Chiid Restraint in the Passenger Seat Position” in the Index for information on how to secure a child restraintin your vehicle. 1. Find the anchors in the passenger seat. See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-31. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top strap to the top strap anchor if your vehicle has one. See Top Strap on page 1-30. Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points. 1-33 Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat Position Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There’s an air bag off switch in the glove box you can use to turn off the passenger’s air bag when you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint at the passenger’s position. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 for more on this, including important safety information. 1-34 Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned off, never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. Here’s why: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle unless the passenger’s air bag has beeE turned off. If a forward-facing child restraintis suitable for your child, always move the passenger seat as far back as it will go. If the air bag readiness Jht ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag, it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system. The passenger’s air bag could inflate even though the switchis off. If this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear-facing child restraintin your vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index. 1-35 You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on page 1-30 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. If you are using a rear-facing child restraint in thisseat, make sure the air bag is turned off. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-44. If your child restraint is forward-facing, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2 or Power Seats on page 1-2. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 1-36 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push , +:-htnn +hn knit dowr I UI I 11 It= CI lllU l G 3 1 I a l l I 1 zs .y,_, u u 1,yi ,I l-!l-l L--:-L 11bI I & II b U"'.. 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 1-37 To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on the passenger’s air bag when you remove the rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-43. , ’ ~ 1-38 Ifthepassenger’s ail ag is tur ~ ffor f a person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the national government, that personwon’t have the extra protection ofan air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’tbe able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there isin a risk group. See “Air Bag Off Switch’’ in the Index for more on this, including important safety information. Air Bag System This part explains the air bag system. Your vehicle has air bags - one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the passenger. Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations. Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system: .Ne jn a crash You can be severel, .njurecif you aren’t wearing your safety belt- even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of . .__. flNKrng things ir-tside%e ~ e h i & G; k k g ejected from it. Air bags are designedto work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. ~ ~ They aren’t designed to inflate at 2 in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly - whether or not there’s an air bag for that person. ~ CAilTiBN: (Continued) Ail ,ags inflate with ,.3at force, _ _ _ _er tha.. blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an :--xm-a:-- Le- I f l l l d r r r l y all w a y , aa \ m ~ n a ..r~mmIA yuu WWWUIU .. ka i+ u\r J W - .--.- \n,ara leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Alwayswear your safety belt, even with air bags. The driver shouldsit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. 1-39 The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for more information. yonewho i ~p -ainst,or vc close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see the parts of this manual called “Older Children” and “Infants and Young Children”. I Where Are the Air Bags? instrument panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-40 If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air The passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. When Should an Air Bag Inflate? What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level”. If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant. In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the passenger. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. 1-42 How Does an Air Bag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module - the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for the passenger’s bag - will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an air bag deployment, you should seek medical attention. In many crashes severe enough to inflate the air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. 1-43 Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the passenger air bag. Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an air bag inflates, you’ll need some newparts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, theair bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. Air Bag Off Switch Your vehicle has a switch in the glove box that you can use to turn off the passenger’s air bag. Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. The module also records speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data. Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealerfor service. Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings. 1-44 This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if the person in the passenger’s position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows: Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: 0 my vehicle has no rear seat; Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: e makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. my vehicle has no rear seat; although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or e the child has a medical condition which, according .-----..--. 4-“ +hrr KO ‘rhe chiid‘s pirysi&l I , I I I ~ K I~L IZlcvzaaat ~ y child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. :I t u I If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the national government, that person won’t have the extra protection of an air bag. In a c:g:sh, !he ~ l hzg r \nrcw!dn’t he able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group. 1-45 To turn off the passenger’s air bag, insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the off position. The AIR BAG OFF light on the center console switch panel will come on to let you know that the passenger’s air bag is off. The passenger’s air bag will remain off until you turn it back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF light will stay on to remind you that the air bag is off. 1-46 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on Dage 7-10. To turn the passenger’s air bag on again, insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch tn !he nn position. For up to 10 seconds after the ignition keyis turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires, wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for youis qualified to do so. The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-47 Restraint System Check Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or ewen death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts. 1-48 If you ever see a label on the driver’s safety belt that says to replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision. You would see this label on the belt near the latch plate. If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even it the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section. 1-49 Section 2 Features and Controls Keys .......................................................... -2-3 Remote Keyless Entry System ......................... 2.4 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2.5 Doors and Locks ............................................. 2.9 Door Locks .................................................... 2.9 Power Door Locks ........................................ 2-10 Lockout Protection ........................................ 2-10 Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-10 Hatchnrunk ................................................. 2-11 Windows ........................................................ 2-14 Power Windows ............................................ 2-15 Sun Visors ................................................... 2-15 Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2-16 Theft-Deterrent System .................................. 2-16 PASS-Key@.................................................. 2-17 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19 New Vehicle Break-in .................................... 2-19 - IY .............................................. LDamFront Air Ignition Positions .......................................... 2-20 Starting Your Engine ... ...................... 2-2 1 1 - Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only) .......................................... 2.23 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2.24 Manual Transmission Operation ..................... -2-27 Parking Brake .............................................. 2.30 Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) ............................ 2.31 Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) ......... ............2.33 Parking Your Vehicle , ....2.34 (Manual Transmission) ................... Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34 Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-35 Running Your EngineWhile You Are Parked (Automatic Transmission) ............................ 2.36 Mirrors ........................................................... 2-37 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ -2-37 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-37 n 0 0 Gutside r o w e r iieaieci iviirrurs ........................ L-QU Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror .................. 2-38 Outside Convex Mirror ............... ............2-38 2-1 2 eatures an Storage Areas ...................... ..... ........ Glove Box ......................... .................... Cupholder(s) ...................... Center Console Storage Area .................... Floor Mats ......................... .................... Rear Storage Area .............. .................... Convenience Net ................ .................... ................... Cargo Cover .................... 2-2 ...2.39 ..-2-39 ...2.39 , ...2.39 ...2.40 ...2.41 ...2.42 ...2.42 ntrols Roof Panel ..................................................... 2.43 Removing the Roof Panel .............................. 2-43 Storing the Roof Panel .................................. 2-46 Installing the Roof Panel ................................ 2-47 Convertible Top .............................................. 2-49 Lowering the Convertible Top .........................2.50 Raising the Convertible Top ........................... 2-53 Vehicle Personalization ................................... 2-55 Memory ....................................................... 2-55 I Leaving children in a vehicle with the igni, n key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with children. 2-3 r One key is used for the ignition, the driver’s door and all other locks. Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have spare keys. If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call Chevrolet Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assisfance Program on page 7-5 for more information. Remote Keyless Entry System L When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer gives the first owner a key and a bar coded tag. Both the key and the tag are attached to a key ring. The paper tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make an extra key. Keep the bar-coded tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily using this tag. If your key doesn’t have a tag and you need a new ignition key, go to your dealer for the correct key code. 2-4 Your vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system that operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Remote Keyless Entry System Operation If you ever notice a decrease in the remote keyless entry transmitter range, try doing one of the following: Your vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system that allows you to lock and unlock your doors, unlock your hatchkrunk lid, turn the panic alarm on and off and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away. e Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. e Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See “Battery Replacement’’ under Remote Keyless Entry system Operation on page 2-5. e Check to make sure that an electronic device such as ;I cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing interference. L If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle’’ later in this section. e Your vehicle comes standard with two transmitters, and up to three can be matched to your vehicle. 2-5 The driver’s door will unlock when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, or press the unlock button again within five seconds to unlock both doors. Also, by pressing the unlock button, it may automatically disarm your theft-deterrent system, depending on how the theft-deterrent system is programmed. If it’s dark enough outside, your interior lamps will come on. Your memory settings will also be recalled when you press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Memory on page2-55 for more information. The hatchhrunk lid will release when the button with the trunk symbol is pressed, as long as the ignition is turned to OFF. The system has a feature that makes it difficult for you to lock your key in your vehicle. If you leave your key in the ignition and attempt to lock the doors, the vehicle will not lock and a chime will sound to remind you that the key is in the ignition. If the door lock is pressed again, within five seconds, the doors will lock and the keys can be locked in the vehicle. This system can’t guarantee that you will never be locked out of your vehicle. Always remember to take your key with you. 2-6 Remote Alarm When you press the horn button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound. This panic alarm button will allow you to attract attention, if needed. If the horn alarm sounds, there are three ways to turn it off: Press the panic alarm button again on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Wait 90 seconds, and the horn will turn off by itself. Turn the key to any position in the ignition, except OFF. Remote Keyless Entry Settings You can adjust the settings on the system through the Driver Information Center (DIC). You can change the type of alarm used by the theft-deterrent system. See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-45 for more information. Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle Each remote kevless entw transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehiclecan have a maximum of three transmitters matched to it. To match transmitters to your vehicle: 1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Clear any warning messages on the Driver Information Center (DIC) by pressing the RESET button. 4. When the message FOB TRAINING is displayed, press the RESET button once. The message HOLD LK + UNLK 1ST FOB will be displayed in the DIC. 5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter simultaneously for five seconds. 6. When a transmitter is learned (matched), the DIC will display FOB LEARNED and then prompt you to learn the second transmitter. 7 . Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the third transmitter. 8. Remove the key from the ignition. The Programming mode will shut off if any of following has occurred: You don’t program any transmitters for two minutes. You take the key out of the ignition You have programmed three transmitters. 3. Press the QPT!nNS hlltton o n the DIC several times until the blank page is displayed, then press and hold the RESET button for two seconds. 2-7 Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about three years. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery. Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. 1- Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on the back of the transmitter and gently pry apart the front and back. 2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter. 3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+) side up. Use a battery, type CR2032, or equivalent. 4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it together so water won’t get in. 5. Test the transmitter. 2-8 Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. Door Locks To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use your door key on the drivers’s side or the remote keyless entry transmitter. ’ 1 Unlocked )ors can be dangerous. 0 Passengers - especially children - can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked,the handle won’t open it. You increase the chance of being thrown 0i;a of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. 0 Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even aeaih from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. e Outsiderscaneasilyenterthroughan unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening. If your theft-deterrent system is armed, unlock the driver’s door with the key or by using the remote keyless entry transmitter to open either door to avoid setting off the alarm. See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-16. . To lock the door from the inside, move the lever located 017 the dGGr fer?.,lard. Tc! un!ock it, mo\./e the !ever on the door rearward. 2-9 Power Door Locks Lockout Protection If you press the power door lock switch when a door is open and a key is in the ignition, a chime will sound. If the power door lock switch is pressed again within five seconds, the doors will lock. Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your door and set the locks from inside or with the remote keyless entry transmitter. Then get out and close the door. Press the power door switch on either door to unlock or lock both doors at once. 2-10 Hatchnrunk I It can be dangerous to drive with the hatch/ trunk lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the hatchhrunk lid: Make sure all other windows are shut. 0 Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Climate Controls.” 0 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panei, open inem aii ihe way. Notice: If you put things in the hatchhrunk area, be sure they won’t break the glass when you close it. Never slam the hatch/trunk lid down. You could break the glass or damage the defogger grid. When you close the hatchhrunklid, make sure you pull down from the center, not the sides. If you pull the hatchhrunk lid down from the side too often, the weatherstrip can be damaged. Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the rear storage compartments located in the hatchltrunk area. Ilf you do, the objects could damage the underbody. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. 2-1 1 Hatchnrunk Lid Release The remote keyless entry transmitter will also release the hatch/trunk lid. See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-4. If your vehicle is equipped with a hatch and you have lost battery power, use the manual release cables to open the hatch. To access the cables, remove the two access panels located in the rear of the trunk area. There is one cable located under each access panel. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-41 for more information. To use the hatchhunk lid release on vehicles with an automatic transmission, your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For manual transmissions, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-30. Press the button with the trunk symbol on it, located at the left side of the steering column on the instrument panel, to release the hatch/trunk lid from inside your vehicle. Pull each cable straight down for each latch to release the hatch. 2-12 If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible top/hardtop and you have lost battery power, use the manual release cable to open the trunk lid. To access the cable, remove the center storage compartment lid located in the rear of the trunk area. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-37 for more information. Emergency Trunk Release Handle (Convertible Only) - Pull the cable straight down to release the trunk lid. If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible top and trunk release handle and you have lost battery power, use the trunk release handle to open the trunk. Notice: The emergency trunk release handle is not designed to be used to tie down the trunk lid or as an anchor point when securing items in the trunk. Improper use of the emergency trunk reiease handle could damage it. There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release handle located on the rear wall of the trunk below the latch. This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pu!l the release hartd!e down tc! npen the trunk from the inside. 2-13 Windows Leaving children in a ve,,,Ae with the windows closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-14 Power Windows With power windows, switches on the door control each windowwhen the ignition is on orwhenRAP is present.See“RetainedAccessoryPower (RAP)” under Ignition Positions on page 2-20. Express-Down Window Both driver’s and passenger’s window switches have the express-down feature. Tap AUTO and immediately release. The window will lower completely. To stop the express-down feature from lowering the window completely, simply tap the switch again. You can also open the window any amount by pressing and releasing the switch. To close the window, press and hold the up arrow. Sun Visors To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them to the side. Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the lighted vanity mirror. When the cover is lifted, the lamps will come on automatically, even if the ignition is off. 2-15 Theft-Deterrent Systems Arming the System Vehicle theft is big business, expecially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Use one of the two following items listed here to arm the system: Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. 0 Theft-Deterrent System Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarm system. SECURITY With this system, the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off. This light reminds you to arm the theft-deterent system. Open the door. The SECURITY light should flash. Lock the door with the power door lock switch. The SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on. Close the door. The security light should go off. Now, if a door or the hatchhrunk lid is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off to save battery power. And, your vehicle won’t start. The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you lock the driver’s door with a key, the manual door lock, or if you use the power door lock after the doors are closed. If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave with the keys, have the passenger lock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way the alarm won’t arm, and your passenger won’t set it off. 2-16 Testing the Alarm PASS-Key@ Use the following to test the system: Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key@(Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key@is a passive theft-deterrent system. it works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition. 1. Make sure the hatchhrunk lid is latched. 2. Lower the window on the driver’s door. 3. Manually arm the system. 4. Close the doors and wait 15 seconds. 5. Reach through the open window and manually unlock the driver’s door. I 6. Open the door. The alarm should sound. 7. Turn off the alarm. if the alarm is inoperative, check tu see if the horn works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-86. If the horn works, but the alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer. Disarming the System Always use your key or the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock a dour. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm. If your alarm sounds, listed below are the ways you can disarm it. Unlock the driver’s door with your key. Put t h e key in the ignition. 0 Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. PASS-Key@ usesa resistor pellet in the ignition key that matches a decoder in your vehicle. When the PASS-Key@ system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s -*--&-“ ..-A G n . n l ala1 L c t at tu F c ?!XU! ~ ! ~ E P m i ~ . ~ f! ht ~ ~!, starter won’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someone tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key during this time, the shutdown period will start over again. This discourages someone from randomly trying different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make a match. t u b 1 e r r c t - m c oyoset a 2-17 The key must be clean and dry before it’s inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the SECURITY light comes on, the key may be dirty or wet. If this happens and the starter won’t work, turn the ignition off. Clean and dry the key, wait three minutes and try again. If the starter still won’t work, wait three minutes and try the other ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-86. If the starter won’t work with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first ignition key may be faulty. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key@. 2-18 If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or missing resistor pellet, you will see no SECURITY light. You don’t have to wait three minutes before trying the proper key. If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the starter won’t work. Use the other ignition key, and see your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key@tp have a new key made. If the SECURITY light comes on while driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. If you lose or damage a PASS-Key@ ignition key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key@. In an emergency, call Chevrolet Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on page7-5 for more information. Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break-In Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate ”break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: @ Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or slow - for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. Front Air Dam Your vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has minimal ground clearance for aerodynamics. For this reason, the air dam has a spring-loaded hinge provided and it will retract with road contact. Under normal operation, the air dam will occasionally contact some road surfaces (speed bumps, driveway ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the vehicle as a scraping noise. This is normal and does not indicate a problem. Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road surfaces and avoid them when possible. Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean prematurewear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in --.:Jel:-n n.,Aw., +;-a .,nll m e ) v g f r n lininnc: ..-I. hL.-.-=-YUlUGlllIG G V G l Y y v u L I I I . ~ ma\^, bJv& --a*--- 2-19 Ignition Positions ~ With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to four different positions. OFF: This is the only position from which you can remove the key. If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition switch can’t be turned to OFF unless the shift lever is in PARK (P). ACC (Accessory): This is the position in which you can operate your electrical accessories. If you have a manual transmission removing the key from the ignition switch will lock the steering column and result inloss a of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turnthe key toACC. Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to forceit could break the key or the ignition switch.If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. ON: This is the position to which the switch returns after you start the engine and release the key. The switch stays in ON while the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use ON to operate your electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster messages and telltales. START: This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON for normal driving. 2-20 When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio. A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door while the ignition is in OFF or ACC and the key is in the ignition. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) With RAP, your power windows and the audio system will continue to work for up to 15 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF and neither door is opened. If a door is opened, the power windows and audio system will shut off. Starting Your Engine This vehicle has a computer system that monitors engine speed, throttle and pedal position, and records the current status. Automatic Transmission Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’realready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Manual Transmission The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down - that’s a safety feature. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. 2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you hold the ignition key in START. When the engine starts. let uo of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try. Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicie is moving. if you do, YOU coUid d a ~ a g e the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. 2-21 When starting your engine in very cold weather (below 0°F or -18”C), do this: 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key. 2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer.If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. 2-22 Starter Interlock Feature For your convenience and to avoid damage to your starter, your vehicle is equipped with a starter interlock feature. This feature will not allow you to crank the engine while the vehicle is already running. Racing or Other Competitive Driving See your Warranty Book before using your vehicle for racing or other competitive driving. Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other competitive driving, your engine may use more oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during racing or other competitive driving and keep the level at or near 1 quart (1 L) above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how to add oil, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. After the competitive driving, remove excess oil so that the level on the dipstickis not above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range. Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only) To Use The Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The electrical cord is attached to the generator bracket assembly, between the generator and the windshield washer fluid tank. With the headlamps closed, route the cord in the opening between the headlamp door and the fender panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Do not pinch the cord when closing the hood. 3. P * git into a normal, grounded 1I P J o l tAC outlet. The engine coolant heater is located on the driver’s side of the engine under the manifold. In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant heater is not required. Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a tire. You couia beseriousiy injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord ratedfor at least 15 amps. 2-23 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t it could be damaged. Automatic Transmission Operation How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. There are several different positions for your shift lever. PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. 2-24 : is lngerous to get out of yc vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you haveto. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See “Shifting into Park (P)” in the Index. Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic iransmissivrr siliii i& ~ u ~ - l i ~sysk7-1. .”i You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish. If you do not apply the brake after 15 seconds once the ignition is turned on, you will receive a PRESS BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT message in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-33. REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-32. 2-25 NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NE1JTRAL(N) when your vehicle is being towed. Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a): When driving on hilly, winding roads. 0 Shngintoadriv Jear VI leyour enc_ e is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Don’t shift into a drivegear while your engine Notice: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@ ): This position is for normal driving. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@ ). 2-26 When going down a steep hill. SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you manually select SECOND (2) when you start the vehicle, the transmission will drive (and stay) in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces,or for preventing the transmission from downshifting into FIRST (1) in situations where a downshift would be undesirable. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST (i), the transmission won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. Nofice: If your rear wheels won’t turn, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuckin very deep sand or mud or wereup against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline components from improper operation. Manual Transmission Operation u This is the shift pattern for the six-speed manual transmission. 1 I l l 2 4 6 Here is how to operate your transmission: FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1)’ put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1). SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4)’ FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Tz s k ? , !et ~p E?the =icce!er?fnr n w b l 2nd press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicie stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL. 2-27 NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it is centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear. Shift Speeds (V-nual Trans-'-s(C--) REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressure to get the lever past FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is rolling (at less than 3 mph (5 km/h)). You will be locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). If you have turned your ignition off and wish to park your vehicle in REVERSE (R), you will have to move the shift lever quickly to the right, and immediately forward into gear. 2-28 s .)a gear when you downshift, YOU could lose control of your vehicle. YOU could injure yourself or others. Don't shift down more than one gear at a time when YOU downshift. -- YOU This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for the best fuel economy. J 1 I Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds in mph (km/h) If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good engine performance. Notice: When you are shifting gears, don't move the gearshift lever around needlessly. This can damage parts of the transmission and may require costly repair. Shift directly into the next appropriate gear. One to Four Shift Light (Manual Transmission) 1TO4 SHIFT When this light comes on, you can only shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) instead of FIRST (1) to SECOND (2). After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to a lower gear if you prefer. Notice: Do not try to force the shift lever into SECOND (2) or THIRD (3)when the1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes on. Do not try to re-engage FIRST (1) after starting to shift into FOURTH (4). You will damage your transmission. Shiftonly from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the light comes on. This light will come on when: e The engine coolant temperature is higher than 169°F (76"C), e you are going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and you are 21 percent throttle or less. Downshifting (Manual Transmission) If your vehicle is a coupe or convertible, do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speed greater than shown in the table: You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to turn off this feature. This helps you get the best possible fuel economy. 2-29 If your vehicle is a Z06, do not downshift into a gear shown below at a speed greater than shown in the table: Parking Brake Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, or if you race the engine when you release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the transmission. The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers the gearshift lever near THIRD (3) and FOURTH (4). This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST (1) to SECOND (2) or downshifting from SIXTH (6) to FIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull the gearshift lever toward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3). Make sure you move the lever into SECOND (2) or FIFTH (5). If you let the gearshift lever move in the direction of the pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3). 2-30 To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. Shifting Into Park (P) I’ ’ atic T---nsmissior’ a To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down. Then push the release button in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you couia aiso damage other parts of your vehicle. Make sure the brake warning light is not on before driving. - ~ - - It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even wheri you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. 2-3 1 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission) It can be dange us to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running. ~ 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the button on the lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle. 3 . Turn the ignition key to OFF. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can remove the key from the ignition, the vehicle is in PARK (P). 2-32 If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ‘Shifting Into PARK (P)” listed previously in this section. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-24. As a reminder, you will see a message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) that will say PRESS BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT within 15 seconds unless the brake is pressed. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish. 2-33 If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this: Parking Over Things That Burn 1. Turn the key to ACC. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear you want. 5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon as possible. Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and release the clutch. Things --]atcan burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. 2-34 Engine Exhaust m 0 Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: 0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. * Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. 0 0 Your vehicle was daI..-ged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. Repairs weren’t done correctly. Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into your vehicle: Drive it only with all the windows downto blow out any CO; and Have your vehicle fixed immediately. @ CAUTION: (Continued) L 2-35 Running YourEngine While You Are Parked (Automatic Transmission) It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust.” Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See “Winter Driving” in the Index. 2-36 I--- It canbedangeroustoget c ofyourhide if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you haveto. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shiftlever to PARK (P). Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-31. Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror An inside rearview mirror is attached above the windshield. The mirror pivots so that you can adjust it. You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Pull the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the tab forward for daytime driving. Automatic Bimming Rearview Mirror Your vehicle may have anautomatic dimming rearview mirror with map lamps. This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents rapid changing from the day to night positions while driving under lights and through traffic. The mirror includes two map lamps and an automatic dimming function. There is also an interior console flood lamp located underneath the rearview mirror which remains on at all times. 10 (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by pressing this button located on the lower part of the mirror. Press and hold the button for up to three seconds to turn this feature on or off. . - .. vvnen cieaning ihe mirror, use a paper iuwei WI Sii-liidi material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing. 2-37 Outside Power Heated Mirrors Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off setting on the inside mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page2-37. Outside Convex Mirror Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. The power mirror control is on the driver’s door. It controls the driver’s and passenger’s mirrors. To adjust either mirror, press the LT (left) or RT (right) button to select the mirror, then press the arrows to adjust the direction of the mirror. The mirror will stay selected for 20 seconds after the last adjustment. An indicator light will come on above the mirror that you select. Your preferred mirror position can be stored if you have the memory option. See Memory on page 2-55. For operation of the heated outside mirrors, see Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-22. 2-38 A convex mirror can ---akett .Lgs (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area Glove Box To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your door key to lock or unlock it. The glove box has a light inside. Cupholder(s) The cupholder is located on the center console in front of the ashtray. To open it, place your thumb on the left side of the lid and push down. Raise the right side \Nifh ynVU1 !! ! U S A ! ! I !LJC!. ;nPJ-., Gnm,-.v To use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver’s side front edge of the console and swing it to the passenger’s side. You can use the key to lock and unlock the console. Don’t leave the key in the lock, or it could be damaged when the driver sits down. The fuel filler door release button and accessory power outlet are located inside the center console. 2-39 Floor Mats If your vehicle has floor mats, they are specially designed to remain in position under your feet and out of reach of the accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two locator hooks and the passenger’s side is held in place by one. Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly placed on the floor so that it does not block the movement of the accelerator pedal. How to Remove and Replace the Floor Mats To remove the floor mats, pull up on the rear of the mat to disconnect from the locator hooks. To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the floor mat over the locator hooks and push down into place. 2-40 Rear Storage Area There are three rear storage compartments in the floor of the rear hatchhrunk area. Coupe shown, Convertible and 206 similar If you have a coupe or convertible model, your vehicle will be equipped with three storage compartment lids. If you have a Z06, your vehicle’s three storage compartments will not have lids. To access a storage compartment, pull up on the I ~ . - I - I _ x,-- ,:-I ---.,- I 7 IdlL! I 1U IeledS-5 L I IC IIU. n c l I I W V C +I-^ LI I C ~ L U I ayG compartment lid. When replacing a storage compartment lid, make sure the latch is in the correct location so the latch locks securely into place. 2-4 1 Notice: If your vehicle is equipped with the optional trunk-mounted CD changer, it is stored in the center rear storage compartment. To help avoid damage to the compact disc player, do not store items such as liquids or sharp objects that could damage, puncture or cut the trunk-mounted CD changer or wiring. Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the rear storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects could damage the underbody. Convenience Net Cargo Cover If your vehicle has this feature, the security shade can provide hidden storage in the rear area of the vehicle. The shade is also helpful in blocking the glare from the removable roof when it is stored in the rear compartment. Using the Cargo Cover 1. Hook the elastic loops on the front corners (A) of the shade to the T-nuts located on the front corners of the rear hatch frame. If your vehicle has this feature you will see it on the back wall of the rear area of the vehicle. Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. The convenience net is not for larger, heavier loads. YOU can unhook the net and place it in one of the rear storage compartments when you are not using it. On coupe models only, a vinyl storage bag has also been provided. 2-42 2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch frame, near the rear corners. Roof Panel Your vehicle may have a removable roof panel. Remov9g tt- Roof Parnl 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R). 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sun visors and turn them toward the door glass. 3. Open the rear hatch and remove any items that may interfere with proper storage of the roof panel. Don’t try to remove a roof panel while the vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roof panel while the vehicle is moving could cause an accident. The panel could fall into the vehicle and cause you to lose control, orit could fly off and strike another vehicle. You or others could be injured. Remove the roof pane only when the vehicle is parked. Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone, have someone help you. Notice: To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its edges, Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped stowage receiversafter removing it from the vehicle. 4. Make sure to install the two egg-shaped stowage receivers into the floor of the rear storage compartment. Secure both receivers into their proper positions by turning them counterclockwise. 2-43 5. Lower the windows and open the doors. A B There are two latches on the front of the roof panel near each door (A), and one rear latch (B). 2-44 6. To unlock the front of the roof panel, pull down each of the front handles. Grasp the handles with your fingers and pull each toward you. Complete a 180" turn toward the center of the vehicle. Then push up on each of the handles. 7. To unlock the rear of the roof panel, press the latch release button with your thumb and pull down the latch lever with your fingers. 8. After releasing the latches, return the sun visors to the forward position. 9. Stand on one side of the vehicle and, if necessary, have your helper stand on the other side. Together, carefully lift the front edge of the panel up and forward, and out of the vehicle opening. 10. When the panel is loosened from the vehicle, one person should grasp the root panel as ciose to the center of the vehicle as possible and lift away the panel. 2-45 Storing the Roof Panel I If a roof panel is not stored properly,it could be thrown about the vehiclein a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store a roof panel in the vehicle, always be sure that it is stored securely in the proper location. Notice: To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its edges. Place the roof panelin the egg-shaped stowage receivers after removing it from the vehicle. 1. Turn the roof panel so that the rear edge of the panel is facing the storage area. The locating pins (at the rear of the panel) should point toward the egg-shaped stowage receivers on the floor of the center compartment. 2. Push the panel forward until the pins bottom out in the receivers. 2-46 3. There are two spring-loaded storage pins on the rear wall of the storage compartment (A). These storage pins go into the slots on each side of the roof panel (B). An improperly attached roof panel may fall into or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be injured. After installing the roof panel, always check that it is firmly attached by pushing up on the underside of the panel. Check now and then to be sure the roof panel is firmly in place. 4. Gently lower the roof panel onto the carpeted ledge. Then, pull each release rearward and upward to place the storage pins into the holes of the roof panel. 5. Gently lift and lower the roof panel to be sure it is locked into place. Notice: To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its edges. Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped stowage receivers after removingit from the vehicle. 1. Check to be sure that the front handles and rear latch on the ceiling are in their oPened Positions before attempting to install the roof panel. 2-47 2. If the roof panel is stored in the rear area, grasp it with your right hand at the middle edge near the seatbacks, and with your left hand at the middle of the edge closest to you. Reverse the steps described previously under Storing the Roof Panel on page 2-46. 5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening (A). Then align the pins at the rear of the roof panel weatherstrip with the receiving cup in the body weatherstrip (B). Gently lower the front edgeof the roof panel to the front of the body opening (C). 3. Remove the roof panel from the storage compartment. 6. Turn the front handles toward the side doors to the closed position. 4. In most cases, it is easier to install the removable roof with two people rather than one. Place the roof panel over the vehicle. 2-48 7 . Hook the rear latch by pushing the lever up to the locked position. 8. Grasp and tug the roof panel up and down and side-to-side to make sure the roof panel is securely installed. Convertible Top When lowering and raising the convertible top, you will use the following: If your vehicle has this feature, the following procedures explain the proper operation of the convertible top. Notice: Certain automatic car washes may cause damage to the vehicle. The top fabric can be damaged by top cleaning brushes. For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see "Cleaning Your Convertible Top" under Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-78. A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top C. Storaqe Compartment Lid 2-49 Lowering the Convertible Top Notice: Don’t leave the convertible out with the top down for any long periods of time. The sun and rain can damage the seat material and other things inside the vehicle. 1. Set the parking brake firmly. Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R). 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sun visors and turn them toward the door glass. Notice: Before lowering the convertible top into the storage area, be sure there are no objects in the way of the folded, stored top. The weight of a stored top on items in the storage area may cause the convertible top back glass to break. 2-50 3. Unlock the front of the convertible top by lowering the latch handles and turning them inward. Push the latch handles back to the up position. 4. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward on the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to be vertical off the storage compartment lid (C). The front edge (A) and rear edge (B) should be straight L!p 3.!?cl down 5. Tilt the driver's seatback forward and press the storage compartment release button located on the underside of the storage compartment lid (C) behind the driver's seat. Then raise the storage compartment lid (C). While attempting to raise the lid, if the lid does not release and you hear three chimes, check to make sure the trunk lid is closed. Also, the lid will not release if the alarm is turned on or the trunk lid is open. After pressing the release button, the driver's and passenger's door glass should retract to the full-down position. 2-51 If the vehicle has lost battery power, you can still open the storage compartment lid (C) using the manual release cable. The cable is located underneath the carpeting behind the driver’s and passenger’s seats, in the center of the vehicle. When using the manual release, you must first open the doors to prevent damage to the seals. To access the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting. Then pull the cable to release the storage compartment lid if needed. 2-52 Notices Be sure that the rear edge (B) of the convertible top is in the full-down position before lowering the top into the storage compartment or damage to the top may occur. 6. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the convertible top to allow the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to be moved to its full-down position. Raising the Convertible Top 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R). Lower both windows and sun visors and turn the ignition key to OFF. 7. Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored position. 8. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to assure that the top is fully retracted. 9. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing with a swift, firm motion. 2. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the storage compartment release button, or use the manual release cable if battery power has been lost. Lift the storage compartment lid (C). (After pressing the release button, the driver and passenger door glass should retract to the full-down position, if they have not already been lowered.) 2-53 3. Pull the top up by firmly gripping the front edge (A) of the convertible top with your hand and applying a brisk, firm upward and forward motion to get the top in the full-up position. 2-54 4. Lift the rear edge (6)of the convertible top to its full-up position by first raising the front edge (A). 5. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing with a swift, firm motion. 6. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the convertible top forward. 7. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top down from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the front edge (A) of the convertible top down from the center pull-down handle located in the insideof the vehicle. 8. Turn the latches outward to secure the top in the up position. Vehicle Personalization Memory The MEMORY buttons are located on the driver’s door, above the power mirror controls. The MEMORY buttons can store and recall settings for up to three drivers. Use button 1 to store the settings for the first driver, button 2 for a second driver or press buttons 1 and 2 at the same time for a third driver. To store your memory settings: 1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat position, outside rearview mirror positions, and telescopic steering wheel (if equipped). 2. Press and hold a MEMORY button. The light above the MEMORY button will glow steady for one second and then flash once when the settings are complete. Then the light will go off. 3. Set the climate control temperature, fan speed and mode settings, radio presets, tone, volume, playback mode (AM/FM, tape or CD), tape direction and compact disc position. If p n r ?IP~~CI!P has this featlJre, MEMORY can store and recall the settings for the driver’s seat position, the outside rearview mirror positions, telescopic steering column (if equipped), radio presets, tone, volume, playback mode (AMIFM, tape or CD), last displayed station, compact disc position and tape direction and the last ciimate controi setting. 2-55 Your memory settings are now programmed. Any changes that are made to the audio system and climate controls while driving will be automatically stored when the ignition key is turned off. When first entering your vehicle, after pressing the unlock button on your remote keyless entry transmitter or a MEMORY button, a recall of your settings will occur when the door is closed and the ignition key is in the ignition switch. As the memory settings are recalled, the light above the button will flash until the correct settings are achieved, then glow for five seconds when complete. 2-56 A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any memory seat, mirror or steering column position button. Drivers 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the order in which your remote keyless entry transmitters were programmed. See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-4 for more information. Memory recall will not work if the vehicle is moving. Memory recall will be temporarily interrupted during engine crank. If easy entry is on, you must press the MEMORY button to reset the seat. Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview .......................... Hazard Warning Flashers ................................ Other Warning Devices ................................... Horn ............................................................. Tilt Wheel ..................................................... Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ......................... Exterior Lamps ............................................. Interior Lamps .............................................. Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................. Accessory Power Outlets ............................... Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................ -3-2 3.4 3-4 3.5 3.5 3.6 3.12 3.15 3-17 3.20 3.21 Climate Contrsis ............................................ 3.22 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3.22 Outlet Adjustment ......................................... 3.28 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ............. 3.29 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3-30 Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.31 Tachometer ................................................. 3.31 Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.31 Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3.32 Air Bag Off Light .......................................... 3-32 Voltmeter Gage ............................................ 3.34 Brake System Warning Light .......................... 3.35 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ........................................... 3-36 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3.36 Active Handling System Light ......................... 3.37 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3.38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3.38 Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................. 3-41 Security Light ............................................... 3-42 Check Gages Warning Light ........................... 3-42 Fuel Gage ................................................... 3-42 Driver Information Center (DIC) ....................... 3.44 DIC Controls and Displays ......................... 3-45 DIC Warnings and Messages ..... .............3.53 ........................... .........3-61 Other Messages Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-62 Setting the Time ........................................... 3-62 Radio with Cassette ...................................... 3-63 Radio with CD .............................................. 3-67 Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ........................... 3-70 Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3.75 Understanding Haalo Reception ..................... .a-/ 1 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................-3-97 Care of Your CDs ......................................... 3-78 Care of Your CD Player ................................ 3-78 Fixed Mast Antenna (Z06) .............................. 3-78 Power Antenna Mast Care (Convertible) ...........3-79 Integrated Windshield and Rear Window Antennas (Coupe) ..................................... 3-79 - - 7 3- 1 The main components of your instrument panel are the following: A. Instrument Panel Brightness Control B. Head-Up Display Controls C. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever D. Driver Information Center (DIC) (Located in the Instrument Cluster) E. Instrument Panel Cluster F. Windshield Wiperwasher Lever G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons H. Hazard Warning Flasher I. Center Air Outlets Button J. Audio System K. Climate Controls L.FogLamp Button M. Remote Hatch Release Button (Coupe) or Remote Trunk Release Button (Convertible/ZOG) N. Ignition Switch 0. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown) P. Active Handling Button Q. Accessory Power Outlet (Located in the Center Console) R. Selective Ride Control Switch S. Air Bag Off Light T. Instrument Panel Cupholder U. Remote Fuel Door Release Button (Located in the Center Console) v. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter wI Parking Brake X. Glove Box Y, Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Located Behind the Toe-Board) Z. Air Bag Off Switch (Located in Glove Box) 3-3 Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flasher button is located on the instrument panel above the audio system. I k- Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn't in the ignition. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won't work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. 3-4 Horn To sound the horn, press either horn symbol on the steering wheel. TiIt Wheel A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Telescopic Steering Column If your vehicle has this feature, the telescopic steering column will allow you to adjust the distance the steering wheel is from the instrument panel. The telescopic steering column switch is located on the right side of the steering column. To operate the telescopic steering column, push the switch forward and the wheel will move away from you. Pull the switch rearward and the wheel will move toward you. The telescepic steering columr?pc?sition car! be stnred with your memory settings. See Memory on page 2-55 for more information. 3-5 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. 1- The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: Turn andLane-Change Signals HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger Flash-to-Pass Feature Cruise Control For information on exterior lamps, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-12. 3-6 An arrowontheinstrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it. If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows flash faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out bulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-86. Turn Signal on Chime Flash-to-Pass A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving. To use the flash-to-pass feature, momentarily pull the turn signal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator will flash to indicate to the other driver that you intend to pass. If the low-beam headlamps are off and you have the optional fog lamps on, the fog lamps will flash. If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it back on. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Windshield Wipers To change the headlampsfrom low beam to high or high to low, push the turn signal lever all the way forward. When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel cluster also will be on. To change the headlamps from high to low, pull the lever rearward. Headlamps on Reminder Ifyou turn the ignition off and leave the headlamps or parking lamps on and open a door, YOU Will hear a chime reminding you to turn off the lamps. Use this lever located on the rightside of the steering column to operate the windshield wipers. OFF: Move the lever to OFF to turn off the windshield wipers. 3-7 INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the INT ADJ band down for a longer delay or up for a shorter delay. The further the INT ADJ band is turned upward, the shorter the delay will be and the further the INT ADJ band is turned downward, the longer the delay will be. The wiper speed can only be adjusted when the lever is in the INT position. Use this position for light rain or snow. LO (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first setting past INT, for steady wiping at low speed. Windshield Washer The lever on the right side of the steering column also controls the windshield washer. There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and hold it. The washer will spray until you release the button. The wipers will continue to clear the window for about six seconds after the button is released and then stop or return to your preset speed. -1 HI (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second setting past INT, for steady wiping at high speed. MIST: Move the lever all the way down to MIST for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the band on MIST longer. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the motor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snow from the windshield wiper blades before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen them or warm the windshield before turning the wipers on. If your blades do become worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. 3-8 In freezing weather, n’t us jour u._.;her until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. ~ If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to turn off. For information on the correct washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 and Pat? D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 13. Cruise Control set speed and the speedometer indicated speed may not always be exactly the same. When you apply the brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control disengages. The DIC will show CRUISE DISENGAGED. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page - i3. L With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long L.-A,...:-x..-I J--.--L l UI>G LUI 111 UI U U G ~ I Iuk 11lpb. b ..,-*I, VVUI -L n ar ----A, L-I-.., u ~ ~ ~ ~ W G G U Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise C Q ~ I ~ ~ Q C can be dangerous an slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. u v v about 25 mph (40 km/h). When using cruise control, the accelerator pedal will return to its fully-released position and will not move while cruise control is engaged. The Driver Information Center (DiCj will dispiay the cruise set speed in a digital number. For example, the DIC will say CRUISE SET 60 mph (97 km/h). The cruise If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction Control System begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on. 3-9 Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the cruise set speed. Setting Cruise Cc-trol If you leave your cruise control on wheny not using cruise, you might hit a button ana go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. . 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press the SET button at the end of the lever and release it. The cruise set speed will be displayed by the Driver Information Center (DIC). 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The pedal will return to an idle position. Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of course, disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. 3-10 You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. The speed will not begin to increase until sufficient pedal travel is achieved. Press the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Move the cruise switch to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly, then release it. Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.) The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the cruise set speed. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce speed while using cruise control: Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. 0 To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET button briefly. Each time you do this,you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the cruise set speed. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: 0 0 Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transmission vehicle. Move the cruise switch to OFF. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the message CRUISE DISENGAGED. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, cruise control set speed memory is erased. 3-11 Exterior Lamps Headlamps Doors The exterior lamp switch on the turn signal/multifunction lever operates the headlamps. The exterior lamp switch has three positions: OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off all lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). % (Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to this position turns on the parking lamps, together with the following: Taillamps Parking Lamps SidemarkerLamps - zo (Headlamps): Turning the switch to this position turns on the headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps. 3-12 The headlamp doors are designed to open when you turn the headlamps on, and close when you turn the headlamps and parking lamps off. If you turn the headlamps on, then turn back to the parking lamps setting, the headlamp doors will stay open. You can open the doors manually using the knob next to the headlamp assembly. Turn the knob counterclockwise until the doors are open. Turn the knob clockwise to closethe doors manually. The headlamp doors should be open when driving in icy or snowy conditions to preventthe doors from freezing closed and when washing the vehicle to help clean the headlamps. Notice: In order to avoid possible contact of the hood to the headlamp doors, either take care in raising the hood with the headlamps up, or turn off the headlamps prior to opening the hood. Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shon periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps come on when the following conditions are met: The ignition is on, the exterior lamp switch is off and 0 the parking brake is released. When the DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF. Then start the vehicle. The DRL, headlamps and parking lamps will stay off until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. 3-13 Fog Lamps Twilight Sentinel@’ (Optional in United States, Standard in Canada) Twilight Sentinel@can turn your lamps on and off for you. A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the Twilight Sentinel@work, so be sure it isn’t covered. You can customize your vehicle to turn Twilight Sentinel@on or off (except for vehicles first sold in Canada). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44 to turn this feature on or off. When Twilight Sentinel@is turned on, you will see the following happen: When it’s dark enough outside, the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and parking lamps will come on. The other lamps that come on with headlamps will also come on. Your vehicle may have this feature. Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps or low-beam headlamps must be on or the fog lamps won’t work. To turn the fog lamps on, press the button located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. A light in the button will come on when the fog lamps are on. Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off. 3-14 When it’s bright enough outside, the headlamps will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the OFF position. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp systemwill come on immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrumentpanel brightness control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness” later in this section. With Twilight §entinel@turned on, you can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when it’s dark outside. First set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF. Then start the vehicie. The lamps wiil stay off until you release the parking brake. Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. The knob for this feature is located on the left side of the instrument panel. Twilight Sentinel@ alsoprovides exterior illumination as you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel@has turned on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps will remain on until: The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to the parking lamp position, or a delay time that you select has elapsed. See Driver Information Center @IC) on page 3-44 to select the delay time that you want. You can also select no delay time. If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight Sentinel@ delaywill not occur. The lamps will turn off as soon as the switch is turned off. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. Push and release the knob and it will pop out. Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwise I - tu ..I. ._ I I L . UII I1 11 lei-I-I. Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way down with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver Information Center (DIC) may not be visible. 3-15 Parade Mode Reading Lamps The instrument panel brightness knob has an added feature called parade mode to assist you in seeing certain instrument panel controls if your headlamps are on in the daylight. Turn the knob counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel lights or clockwise to brighten the lights. This will occur only with the parking lamps or headlamps on. Courtesy Lamps When any door or the hatchhrunk lid is opened, the interior lamps will go on (unless it’s bright outside). You can also turn on the courtesy lamps by turning the instrument panel brightness knob all the way clockwise. ExiVEntry Lighting With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on for about 20 seconds when the key is turned to OFF or a door is ajar. Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps. The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on individually by pressing the switch for that lamp. You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning the headlamps on and off or by quickly turning the courtesy lamps on and off. There is also an interior console flood lamp located underneath the rearview mirror which comes on during nighttime operation or when the reading lamps are on. 3-16 Battery Run-Down Protection Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console or glove box lamps are accidentally left on. If you leave any of these lamps on, they will automatically timeout after about 15 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lamps must be turned off or the ignition key must be in ON. Head-Up Display. (HUD) If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it’s dark -.#*..:ADn +A bnmlr tks UI In am~rnwawr l ; w c a u a ( L . c v nb.rp .YY U U C a a u c . c n m u I The information may be displayed in English or metric units and appears as an image focused out toward the front of your vehicle. The HUD consists of the following information: Speedometer Turn Signal Indicators 0 High-Beam Indicator Symbol Tachometer 0 Oil, Temperatureand Fuel Gages * Shift Light (Performance SHIFT Light) This light is used for performance driving to indicate that the vehicle’s best performance level has been reached to shift the transmission into the next higher gear. The SHIFT light will display at an engine speed of about 5,750 rpm (6,250 rpm on Z06), just prior to reaching the engine fuel cut-off mode. 0 CheckGages Icon -...E and placed low in your field of view. If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display (HUD), you can see some of the driver information that appears on your instrument panel cluster. 3-17 There are five HUD selections that you can choose to view in the HUD display. By pressing and holding the PAGE button, you can scroll through these pages in the following order: 0 The selections that you choose will remain in the HUD display until they are changed. Speed Only Speed and Gage 0 Speed, Tachometer and Gage Speed and Tachometer Tachometer Only When you have chosen the desired HUD display, release the PAGE button. Gages can be scrolled through by tapping the PAGE button (only when a gage is displayed). The gages shown are the following: Oil Pressure Coolant Temperature Fuel Level 3-18 Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle without HUD. If you never look at your instrument panel cluster, you may not see something important, such as a warning light. Under important warning conditions, the CHECK GAGES icon will illuminate in the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC) for more information. To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the following: 1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control all the way up. The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD dimmer control set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim. 1 The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering wheel. It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD causing all of the graphics to light up. The display will return to normal when the sunlight is no longer entering the HUD. 2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. If you change your seat position later, you may have to re-adjust your HUD. 3. Press the top nr hnttnm nf t h e DISPI AY switch to center the HUD image in your view. The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, not side-to-side. 4. Slide the dimmer control downward until the HUD iiTiage is no brighter than riecessary--TI u I.."* L U I I I UI nuu In off, slide the switch to OFF. 3-19 If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may need to adjust the HUD brightness again using the dimmer control. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see. To change from English to metric units, press the E/M button located to the right of the steering wheel. Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image. To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit. If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image, check to see if: Something is covering the HUD unit. The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height. Ambient light (in the direction your vehicle is facing) is low. A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-86. Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD system. If you ever have to have your windshield replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus. 3-20 Accessory Power Outlets The accessory power outlet can be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB radio. The accessory power outlet is located inside the center console storage compartment, on the forward left side. To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. Notice: When using an accessory power outlet, maximum electrical load must not exceed 15 amps. Always turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain your battery. Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets. Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should. This wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment, and never use anything that exceeds the amperage rating. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment. We recommend that you see a qualified technician or your dealer for the proper installation of your equipment. Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type~d accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper useof the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on the instrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use the ashtray, lift up on the bottom of the door. Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire. Loose objects (such as paper clips) can lodge behind and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects near the ashtray. To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself. Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If youdo, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element. 3-2 1 Climate Controls Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. When your vehicle is first started, the display will show the driver’s temperature setting, the fan speed and the air delivery for approximately five seconds; then it will show the outside temperature. The digital display will show readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius by pressing the E/M (English/metric) button on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Automatic Operation AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button to place the entire system in the automatic mode. When automatic operation is active, the system will automatically control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode and the fan speed. 3-22 After a five-second display of the current settings, only the word AUTO and the outside temperature will be shown on the digital display unless the system is set to full cold 60°F (16°C) or full hot 90°F (32”C), then the word AUTO will not display. The system will operate to achieve your comfort set temperature as quickly as possible. The AUTO control system works best with the windows up and the removable roof installed or the convertible top up. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting between 60°F (16°C) or full hot 90°F (32°C). Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster. If you set the system at the coldest or warmest temperature setting, the system will remain in manual mode at that temperature and it will not go into automatic mode. In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan speeds at avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle n n t i ! vmrrner air is available. The system will start out blowing air at the floor but may change modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The length of time needed for warm up will depend on the outside temperature and the length of time that has elapsed since your vehlc!e was !as! driven. 3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more information on the solar sensor, see “Solar Sensor’’ later in this section. Manual Operation OFF: Press this button to turn off the climate control system. This is the only setting that fully shuts off the fan. The digital display will show only the outside temperature. You can still adjust the driver’s set temperature, the passenger temperature offset and the air intake mode while in OFF. MODE: Press this button to manually lock in the current air delivery setting and to stop the automatic mode control. Pressing the MODE button will delete AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics will be shown. To change the setting, press the MODE button again. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to the automatic mode selection. 3-23 To change the current mode, select one of the following: f;’ (Vent): This mode directs most of the air to the instrument panel outlets, with a very small amount of air directed to the floor outlets. $2(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward the windshield. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard Outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to the windshield. The MODE button can also be used to select the defog mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can be found later in this section. @ (Fan): Press the button with the fan symbol to manually increase or decrease the fan speed. Keep pressing the up or down arrow on this switch until the desired fan speed appears on the display. 3-24 Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from the digital display. The fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be shown. To increase the fan speed so that more air flows into the vehicle, press the up arrow on the fan switch. To decrease the fan speed and airflow, press the down arrow. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to the automatic fan control. 113 (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on, outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle. When the button is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that it is activated. The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but cannot be used with the recirculation mode. When in the AUTO mode, the system automatically selects outside air instead of recirculation, as required, to control the temperature in the vehicle. By pressing outside air, the system will lock into the outside air mode. Any adjustment to the air intake must then be made manually. Outside air should be used when trying to defrost or defog windows to help reduce moisture inside of the vehicle. If you are in city traffic, your vehicle is stopped and idling, or the weather is hot, the system may switch from the outside air mode to the recirculation mode. To prevent the air inside of your vehicle from becoming stale, be sure to return to the outside air mode periodically. &I (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. When the button is pressed, an indicator light will come on. The air-conditioning Compressor also comes on. The recirculation mode cannot be used with the outside air mode. When in the AUTO mode, the system automatically selects recirculation to cool the vehicle’s temperature. By pressing this button, the system will lock into recirculation mode. Any adjustment to the air intake must then be made manually. Recirculation is not available when using the defrost or defog mode because outside air is needed to reduce moisture inside of the vehicle. Operating the system in the recirculation mode may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch the system to either the defog or detrost moue ana increase the fan speed. To avoid re-fogging of the windows, operate the system in the outside air mode. Temperature Control: The DRIVER knob changes the temperature on the driver’s and passenger’s side of the vehicle. Turn the knobclockwise or counterciockwise to manually increase or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle. Whenever you turn this knob, the temperature will be displayed for approximately five seconds along with the current fan speed and air delivery mode. The PASSENGER knob changes the temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. When the knob is in the 12 o’clock position, the passenger’s temperature is the same as the driver’s. Turn the knob clockwise for warmer air on the passenger’s side or counterclockwise for cooler air. If the driver-set temperature is set at full cold 60°F (16°C) or full hot 90°F (32”C), turning the PASSENGER knob has no effect because the system is locked at a maximum setting. )#t A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override the automatic system and turn the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the air conditioning is activated. When in AUTO, the air-conditioning compressor will come on automatically, as necessary. Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures below approximately 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). The air conditioning cannot be turned off in defrost and defog, as it helps to remove moisture from the vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear. 3-25 You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while still maintaining the selected temperature. On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. For quick cool down on hot days, do the following: 1. Select the vent mode. 2. Select recirculate mode. 3. Select the N C . 4. Select the coolest temperature. 5. Select the highest fan speed. Using these settings together for long periods of time may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off. The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal. 3-26 Sensors The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar radiation and uses the information to maintain the selected temperature when operating in AUTO mode by initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery system. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top right side of the instrument panel near the windshield or the system will not work properly. There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a false reading in the temperature. If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed temperature will not change until: @ e The vehicle’s speed is above 16 mph (26 km/h) for one and a half minutes. The vehicle’s speed is above 45 mph (72 km/h) for one minute. These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature goes down, the outside temperature will be shown when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled from the previous vehicle operation. There is also an inside temperature sensor located to the left of the ignition switch. The automatic climate control system uses this sensor to receive information, so if you block orcover it, the system will not function properly. Defogging and Defrosting There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use FRONT to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Press the MODE button until the defog mode appears on the display. +3(Defog): This mode directs the air equally between the windshield and the floor outlets with a small amount to the side window outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. An indicator light in the A/Cbutton wiii come on io iei you know ihai iire air-conditioning compressor is activated. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. FRONT: Pressing this button directs most of the air to the windshieid, with a smaii amount aireciea io ihe side window outlets. The light on the button will come on and the digital display will show the defrost mode symbol and fan speed when the front defrost mode is being used. In this mode, the system will automatically turn off the recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. An indicator light in the A/C button will come on to let you know that the air-conditioning compressor is activated. Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Pressing this button again will return the system to the last operating mode and the air intake mode will be in outside air. If the system is in FRONT defrost when you shut the engine off, it will restart in FRONT defrost unless the engine is off for longer than 40 minutes. If the engine is off longer than 40 minutes, the system will restart in the operating mode that was set prior to FRONT defrost and the air intake mode will be in outside air. Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window. The rear window defogger will only work when the engine is running. rHfr REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on. Be sure to clear as much snow from rear windo\i\i as possible. iildizaio; light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated. 3-27 The rear window defogger will automatically turn off approximately 15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only run for approximately seven minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. Your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors when the rear window defog button is pressed. Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid. 3-28 Outlet Adjustment Use the tab located on the air outlets to change the direction of the airflow. Operation Tips Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system. Keep the area around the base of the instrument panel console and air path under the seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively. Warning Lights, Ga Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly-and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center that works along with the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44. 3-29 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have left and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights, gages and DIC messages are explained on the following pages. United States shown, Canada similar 3-30 Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). There is only one scale for mph and km/h. When you press the E/M (English/metric) button on the Driver Information Center (DIC), the cluster will calculate the proper speed and move the needle to the correct position. Either the MPH or the km/h telltale will illuminate, depending on which measurement you choose. Fuel will shut off at about 6200 rpm (6500 rpm for Z06). To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the parking lamps. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. The mileage total of the new odometer will be set to the original miles (kilometers) of the old odometer. See your dealer if the odometer must be replaced in your vehicle. If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure to operate your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on until the driver’s belt is buckled. 3-31 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows a deployed air bag symbol. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag System on page 1-39. This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. 7 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. 3-32 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the air bag system may not be working properly. The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. Air Bag Off Light When you turn the passenger’s air bag off, this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag has been turned off. This light will go off when you turn the air bag back on again. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-43 for more on this, including important safety information. If the passenger’s air bagis turned off for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the national government, that person won’t have the extra protectionof an air b a g h a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be ableto inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information. 3-33 Voltmeter Gage If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turnedoff the air bag, it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system. The passenger’s air bag could inflate even though the switch isoff. If this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear-facing child restraintin your vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index. 3-34 When the key is in ON with the engine not running, the voltmeter shows the voltage output of your battery. When the engine is running, it shows the voltage output of the charging system. The reading will change as the rate of charge changes (with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel cluster and other systems may shut down. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at 10 volts or below could drain your battery and disable your vehicle. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. This light should come on when you turn the ignition key to START. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If this warning light stays on after you start the engine, the parking brake may still be set or there could be a brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-30 to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have your brake system inspected right away. If the light comes on while you are driving and you have a LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-33. ‘- -ur brake -]stem may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is stiii on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. 3-35 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti-lock brake system, the light will come on when your engine is started and may stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35. Also see “Service ABS” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 3-36 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light This light should come on briefly as you start the engine. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message when you’re driving, there’s a problem with your TCS system and your vehicle needs service. When this light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. If the driver turns off the Traction Control System by pressing the button on the console, the TCS system light will come on and the TRACTION SYSTEM OFF message will show on the DIC. Active Handling System Light The Active Handling System light will come on briefly as you start the engine. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. The light will also come on while the system warms up and the ACT HNDLING WARMING UP message will be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). If the light stays on or comes on while you are driving, a chime sounds and a SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLC; message appears on the DIC, there is a problem with your Active Handling System and your vehicle needs service. When the system is working, you will see the ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. You may also feel or hear the system working. This is normal. If the driver turns off the Active Handling System by pressing the button on the console, the Active Handling System light will come on, a chime will sound, and the PRAC/ACT HNDLG OFF message will be displayed in the DIC. The Traction Control System will also be turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. If the Active Handling System and the Traction Control System are off, pressing the console button momentarily wili turn both systems on. The DIC wiii dispiay the TRAC/ACT HNDLG ON message, the instrument cluster light will be off, and a chime will sound. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53 for more information. The driver can acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET button. When the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message is displayed, the Active Handling System will not assist you in controlling the vehicle. You should have the system serviced as soon as possible. A A:. .-L .,-. .,, nuJua1yuul A A . A m m .-.mmnw,4~mml,, UI I V l l ly CILLUIUII l y l y . 3-37 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light I Yourvehicle is' equipped . . . CHECK United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area, your engine is too hot. This means that your engine coolant has overheated. If You have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. (The larger tic marks are in increments of 30" below 220°F (104°C) and in increments of IO" above 220°F (104"C).) See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for more information. 3-3% with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems. This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. Nofice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired. This !ight w i l l a!so C O R ~09 &!ring a malfunction in one of two ways: Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center +grjnncig 2nd cpnjcp ms-wJ ha - - rpn~lir~TJ0 Light On Steady - An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required. If the Light Is The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: 0 Reducing vehicle speed. 0 Avoiding hard accelerations. 0 Avoiding steep uphill grades. If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light is On Steady” foiiowing. if the iight is stiii flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service. You also may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing iuei cap wiii aiiow iuei to evaporate into t h e atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. 3-39 Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. If none of the above steps have made the light turn oft, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. 3-40 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspectthe emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection: Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection. Engine Oil Pressure Gage The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44. d Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. L United States Canada The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running. Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty. Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). in certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot __ _ _ .--: -.-^I Ldays, .I 1 1 GUUIU I ~ C I Uc13 I U V V aa u p a \4u n r a) al1u aull u c considered normal. It may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the shaded area show the normal operating range. Readings in the shaded area tell you that the engine is low on oil, or that you might have some other oil problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. ~~ 1-1 _ _ _ _ I 1 Tr I A n #-I-i-\ -L:ll 3-41 This light can come on for the following reasons: Security Light SECURITY 1 This light comes on to remind you to arm your theft-deterrent system. If it comes on and stays on when your ignition is on, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2- 16 and PASS-Key on page 2-17. Check Gages Warning Light CHECK GAGES 3-42 This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, check your gages to see if they are in the warning areas. 0 Low Oil Pressure 0 High Coolant Temperature High or Low Battery Voltage 0 Low Fuel Level Fuel Gage m Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on. When the needle approaches the red zone, RESERVE FUEL will appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. When the needle approaches the E, LOW FUEL will appear on the display. At this time, you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon. Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s). Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message but the LOW FUEL message will come on again in 10 minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle. Here are five things that some owners ask about. All these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage. At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads F (full). It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to fit it. The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking or speeding up. e You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to display more detailed fuel information. Each time you press FUEL, one of the following will appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC). e 0 0 AVERAGE: The fuel economy calculated for the current tank of fuel, or since you last reset the display. INST (Instant): The fuel economy calculated for your current driving conditions. RANGE: The distance you can drive before refueling. You should reset the fuel information display every time you refuel. To reset the display, press FUEL until AVERAGE appears. Then, press RESET on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The gage may not indicate E (empty) when the ignition is turned off. The gage reading may change slightly within the first several minutes after starting the vehicle. 3-43 Driver Information Center (DIC) The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display information about how your vehicle is functioning, as well as warning messages if a system problem is detected. The DIC display area is located in the instrument panel cluster below the speedometer and tachometer, directly above the steering column. The following buttons are located on the DIC control panel which is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster. 1 FUEL: Press this button to display fuel information such as fuel economy and range. 2 GAGES: Use this button to display gage information like oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, automatic transmission fluid temperature, battery voltage and fronurear tire pressures. 3 TRIP: Use this button to display your total and trip miles, the elapsed time function, your average speed and the engine oil life. 4 OPTIONS: This button allows you to choose personal options that are available on your vehicle, depending on the options your vehicle is equipped with, such as security, door locks, easy entry seats and language. 5 E/M (English/Metric): Use this button to change the display between English and metric units. RESET: This button, used along with the other buttons, will reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge messages on the Driver Information Center (DIC). At the top of the DIC control buttons is a light sensor. Be sure not to block the sensor or your lighting functions may be disrupted. 3-44 Dl6 Controls an Displays Turn on the system by turning the ignition to ON. When you turn on the ignition, the DIG will be in the mode last displayed when the engine was turned off. Each Dl@ button allows you to scroll through a menu. A blank page ends each menu. [ ~ ) - -I - IrI \ 2 I 1 I1 AVERAGE 27.0 MPG INST. 20.4 MPG - I RANGE I 220 MI 1 If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will appear on the display. Press RESET to acknowledge any current warning or service messages. The following pages will show the messages you can see on the Driver information Center (DIC) display by pressing the DIC buttons. I F The FUEL button displays average fuel economy and instantaneous fuel economy calculated for your specific driving conditions and range. Press the FUEL button to display average fuel economy, such as: 0 AVERAGE 20.1 MPGor * AVERAGE 5.3 UIOO km TL, I I IG -.,-1-1- avclayG $,,-I IUGI . . _ _ _ _ _ -,n . /, , ,,n,",nA G ~ W IIW I I I Y IJ VIGVVGU n p UJ r\ u Inr?rr IWI trrrm ~y L - I I I I approximation of your overall driving conditions. If you press RESET in this mode while you're driving, the system will begin figuring fuel economy from that point in time. 3-45 Press FUEL again to display instantaneous fuel economy, such as: INST. 20.1 MPG or 2 GAGES The GAGES button allows you to scroll through the functions listed below when you press it. INST. 5.3 UlOO km Press FUEL again to display the range, such as: RANGE20 MI or RANGE32km The range calculates the remaining distance you can drive without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank. If the range is lower than 30 miles (48 km), the display will read RANGE LOW. [ 1 7 [OIL PRESSURE I I COOLANT TEMP TRANS FLUID 40 PSI1 1 2 3 O F II 123°F BATTERY VOLTS I IFRONT I REAR 13.5 L 34 R 33 L 34R psi I 33 PSI I The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Resetting the fuel range causes the fuel economy data to be updated immediately. Press RESET to reset the fuel range. Press the GAGE button to display the oil pressure, such as: OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa 3-46 Press the GAGE button again to display the oil temperature, such as: 0 OIL TEMP 234°F or 0 OILTEMP112°C Press the GAGE button again to display the coolant temperature, such as: Press the GAGE button again to display the tire pressure for the rear tires (except Z06), such as: 0 REAR L34 R33 PSI or REARL234R228kPa Tire pressure is not available until the vehicle has reached a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more. 0 COOLANTTEMP123°For 3 TRIP 0 COOLANTTEMP51°C The TRIP button allows you to scroll through the functions listed below when you press it. Press the GAGE button again to display the automatic transmission fluid temperature, such as: 0 TRANS FLUID 123°F or 0 TRANSFLUID51°C Press the GAGE button again to display the battery voltage, such as: 0 BATTERYVOLTS13.5 Press the GAGE button again to display the tire ~ j ~ s s u TU ;t :T ;;-,efrU ;ires i-,ijencep; -77Gj, su..p, -..: 0 FRONTL34R33PSIor 0 FRONTL234R228kPa MI ODOMETER 12345 TRIP A MI 123.4 TRIP B MI 123.4 CI A D LU\I . T I ~ M C 1 tlllL AVG.§PEED nn.nn n "V.""." 000.0 MPH = OIL LIFE REMAIN 89% 3-47 Odometer Miles Since Last Ignition Feature The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers. Press the TRIP button to display odometer readings such as: ODOMETER12345 MI or You can also display number of miles (kilometers) driven since you last started the vehicle if you press and hold the RESET button for two seconds, then release. The miles (or kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set into the trip odometer. ODOMETER 20008 km Elapsed Time Without the keys in the ignition, you can also display the odometer by turning on the parking lamps. Press the TRIP button until ELAP. TIME is displayed, such as ELAP. TIME OO:OO:OO.OO. Trip Odometers When the ignition is in ON, the Driver Information Center (DIC) can be used as a stopwatch. The display can show hours, minutes, seconds and hundredths of a second. The elapsed time indicator will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it will reset to zero and continue counting. (Hundredths are shown up to 59 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths). The display appears as ELAP. TIME OO:OO:OO.OO in the elapsed time function. There are two trip odometers. Press the TRIP button and TRIP A will be displayed. Press it again and TRIP B will be displayed. TRIP A could be used to track the distance to a destination. TRIP B could be used to track maintenance periods. 1. TRIP A 130.5 MI or 2. TRIP A 209.9 km 3. TRIP B 300.5 MI or 4. TRIP B 483.5 km The trip odometers can be reset by pressing the RESET button on the DIC. Both of the trip odometers can be used simultaneously. 3-48 You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing RESET. To reset the elapsed time to zero, stop the timer by pressing RESET. Then press and hold RESET until ELAP. TIME OO:OO:OO.OO appears in the DIC. Average Speed Press the TRIP button until the average speed is displayed, such as: 4 AVERAGESPEED 62 MPH or 4 AVERAGESPEED 100 km/h Press reset in this mode to start calculating the average speed. Press and hold RESET to clear. Engine Oil Life Press the TRIP button until the engine oil life is displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAIN 89%. This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 188% when the system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alert you with the message CHANGE OIL SOON. When the oil life is down to zero, you will receive the message CHANGE OIL NOW. Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It can’t be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the system, see “How to Reset the Change Oil Soon Message” under Engine Oil on page 5-13. Also, see Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. 3-49 4 OPTIONS This button allows you to choose personal options that may be available on your vehicle, depending on the options your vehicle is equipped with. Some of these functions work along with the remote keyless entry transmitter. When returning to the options menu, the first item of the options list will always be displayed, not the one you were last in when you changed buttons. The following are the options listed under the OPTIONS button: Twilight (Optional in United States, Standard in Canada) Press the OPTIONS button until TWILIGHT-OFF appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following selections: ' TWILIGHT - ON TWILIGHT - OFF I TWILIGHT-OFF LOCK&ARM-HORN ONLY ALARM-HORN IAPPROACHLIGHTSON1 ]AUTO LOCK ON-- SEAT EASY ENTRY ON LANGUAGE ENGLISH t If you choose TWILIGHT - ON, press the OPTIONS button again to display DELAY TIME 1 2 in the DIC. Use the OPTIONS button to switch between delay time 1 and 2. You can increase the delay time by pressing button 1 (1 FUEL) or decrease the time by pressing button 2 (2 GAGE§). Each bar is equal to 12 seconds. Lock and Arm Press the OPTIONS button until LOCK & ARM appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following selections: LOCK & ARM - OFF FOB TRAINING TIRE TRAINING e LOCK & ARM - HORN ONLY LOCK & ARM - LIGHTS ONLY LOCK & ARM - HORN & LIGHTS 3-50 If you choose LOCK & ARM - OFF, you will receive no security feedback when locking or unlocking your vehicle. If you choose LOCK & ARM - HORN ONLY, only the horn will chirp to let you know when your alarm system has armed when locking your vehicle. If you choose LOCK & ARM - LIGHTS ONLY, only your exterior lamps will flash to let you know when your alarm system has armed when locking your vehicle. If you choose LOCK & ARM - HORN & LIGHTS, the horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash briefly to let you know the system has armed when locking your vehicle. Alarm 0 A I A n n B LJnnhl n L n 1 1Ivt-1 I u I I I Y ALARMHORN & LIGHTS If you choose ALARM-HORN, the horn will sound during an alarm. II IT _I Press the OPTIONS button until APPROACH LIGHTS appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following choices: 0 APPROACHLIGHTS ON APPROACHLIGHTS OFF If you choose APPROACH LIGHTS ON, the fog lamps, front turn signal, rear back-up and courtesy lamps will come on for 30 seconds when you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter. This will occur only when it is dark outside. APPROACH LIGHTS OFF turns off this option. See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-4 for more information. Auto Lock Press the OPTIONS button until ALARM appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following selections: ' Approach Lights _____ A I n n & a I ~ n n h o l I 1 p u - r ~+h,. hmr- ..,;II Y W U GllWWse nLnnlvl n u n l v a uun I 3 , LIIC IIUIII sound and the interior and exterior lamps will flash during an alarm. vvlll Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO LOCK appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following choices: 0 AnTn LQCK nn AUTOLOCK OFF If you choose AUTO LOCK ON, both doors will automatically lock when the vehicle exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h) in a manual transmission. In a vehicle with an automatic tra.nsmissionj both doors will automatically lock when you move the shift lever out of PARK (P). Choose AUTO LOCK OFF to turn this option off. 3-51 Auto Unlock The AUTO UNLOCK will be available only if AUTO LOCK is set to ON as described previously. Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO UNLOCK appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following choices: AUTOUNLOCKDRIVER 0 AUTOUNLOCKBOTH AUTOUNLOCK OFF If you choose AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER, the driver’s door will automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle off and pull the key out of the ignition. Choose AUTO UNLOCK BOTH, and both doors will automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle off and pull the key out of the ignition. If you choose SEAT EASY ENTRY ON, when you turn the ignition off and remove the key, the seat will automatically move back and the telescopic steering wheel (if equipped) will return to its full-forward position for an easy exit or an easy entrance when returning to the vehicle. The seat will only return to the forward position if you unlock the door with the keyless entry transmitter or press the appropriate MEMORY button. SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF turns off this option. Languages You can select which language the DIC will display its messages. Press the OPTIONS button until the word LANGUAGES appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following choices: LANGUAGEENGLISH AUTO UNLOCK OFF turns off this option. LANGUAGEFRENCH Easy Entry LANGUAGEGERMAN The easy entry feature will only be available if the vehicle is equipped with the memory option. Press the OPTIONS button until SEAT EASY ENTRY appears on the display, then use the RESET button to page through the following choices: SEAT EASY ENTRY ON SEAT EASYENTRY OFF 3-52 0 LANGUAGESPANISH IC Warnings and Messages Blank Page There is a blank page at the end of the OPTIONS menu. When the blank page is displayed, you can access the following items: FOB TRAINING: This option allows you to match the RKE transmitter(s) to your vehicle. You can access this option by pressing and holding RESET for three seconds while you are on the blank page at the end of the OPTIONS menu. The message FOB TRAINING will be displayed. See “Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle’’ under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 TIRE TRAINING (Except Z06): The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) operates with battery-powered sensors that are located inside the valve stems on each tire. Each sensor has a unique ID code so the vehicle knows the tire location of the sensor. When the vehicle reaches a speed of greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the -nn,-nrp ab, IOU,- ... -. hnnin in cand tho tirn nraccllrn roadinnc “VI n u uvy,, I l.V ---.. .2 r ’-e--. .I I” Y The following messages and warnings may appear in the DIC display. The DIC display area is located in the instrument panel cluster below the speedometer and tachometer, directly above the steering column. You may receive more than one message at a time. Messages will appear one behind the other. To acknowledge a message and remove it from the display, press RESET. You may scroll through the messages that may have been sent at the same time. The message center is continuously updated with the vehicle performance status. ABS ACTIVE (Anti-hock Brake System Active): When your anti-ioek system is adjusiing brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, the ABS ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will stay on for a few seconds after the system stops adjustinG brake pressure. a receiver inside the vehicle. These readings are displayed when using the GAGES button on the DIC. If you are unable to display your tire pressures while the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), you may need to have your sensor ID codes learned by the vehicle. See your dealer. 3-53 ACT HNDLG - WARMING UP: When you first start your vehicle (especially during cold winter weather), and begin to drive away (up to 6 mph (10 km/h)), the message ACT HNDLG - WARMING UP may be displayed in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light will be on, and a chime will sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET button. The Active Handling System performance is affected until the next message WARM UP COMPLETE is displayed in the DIC. TRAC/ACT HNDLG - OFF: By pressing the Active Handling System console button briefly, the driver can turn the Traction Control and Active Handling Systems off. The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG - OFF will be displayed in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light will be on and a chime will sound. You can acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET button. The anti-lock brake systems remains on with the Traction Control and Active Handling Systems off. You should adjust your driving accordingly. During hot or cold temperature conditions, this message may be displayed in the DIC after exceeding 12 mph (20 km/h) for 30 seconds. The Active Handling System is off until the WARM UP COMPLETE message is displayed. COMPETITIVE DRIVING: When the Competitive Driving mode is selected, this message will be displayed in the DIC. The instrument panel cluster light will not be on when the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The Traction Control System will not be operating while in the Competitive Driving mode. You should adjust your driving accordingly. WARM UP COMPLETE: If you receive this message and hear a chime, the system has completed the functional check of the Active Handling System. TRAC/ACT HNDLG - ON: If the Traction Control and Active Handling Systems are off, pressing the Active Handling System console button momentarily will turn both systems on. The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG - ON will be displayed temporarily in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light will be off and a chime will sound. 3-54 SERVICE ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System): If the SERVICE ABS message is displayed when you are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the message stays on, or comes back on again while you are driving, your vehicle is in need of service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35. If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, your Traction Control System and the Active Handling System will also be disabled. The Driver Information Center will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS, SERVICE TRACTION SYS and SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG, and the instrument cluster car icon will be illuminated. The driver can acknowledge these messages by pressing the reset button three times. When the service message is displayed the computer controlled systems will not assist the driver and you should have the system repaired as soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly. SERVICE COLUMN LOCK (Manual Transmission Only): If the system that controls the locking and unlocking of the steering column does not work properly, have the vehicle towed to a dealer for service. PULL KEY - WAIT 10 SEC (Manual Transmission Only): If this message comes on, the steering column lock system has detected a problem while disengaging the steering column lock. This message may occur when tne igniiion key is removea arlci reirisel kci befurt: ti-le steering column lock system fully locks or unlocks the steering column. To acknowledge that you have read this message, and to clear it from the display, remove the ignition key and wait 10 seconds before reinserting the key into the ignition. If you attempt to operate your vehicle without removing the key for i 0 seconds, the vehicle’s fuel system will shut off when you reach 1.5 mph (2.4 km/h). If the message stays on after removing the key and waiting 10 seconds, have your vehicle taken to an authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. LOW OIL PRESSURE: You will hear four chimes and the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press the RESET button. After you press the RESET button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a chime every minute until the vehicle is serviced. If you do not press RESET, the message will remain on the digital display until the vehicle is serviced. Low oil pressure may be the result of a combination ot low oil level and abrupt changes in the vehicle’s direction. When this warning is displayed, you should not operate the engine at high rpm or make fast abrupt moves. As soon as possible, you should check the oil level. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. LOW OIL LEVEL: Press RESET to acknowledge that you have read the message and to remove it from the display. The message will reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. Once the vehicle senses a temperature change in the engine oil, the light will remain off. You will hear two chimes when this message is displayed. If this message appears after starting your engine, your engine oii ievei may be too iow. Y O U may need to add oil. See Engine Overheating on page 5-25. 3-55 REDUCED ENGINE POWER: You will hear chimes continuously when this message is displayed. To acknowledge that you have read the message and to remove it from the display, press RESET. The message will reappear every 15 seconds until this condition changes. If the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message and the CHECK ENGINE light comes on, a noticeable reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur. If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime the CHECK ENGINE light stays on, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. Also, refer to Malfunction lndicator Lamp on page 3-38. If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed in combination with the COOLANT OVER TEMP message, see Engine Overheating on page5-26. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: If this message appears on the DIC, there may be an electrical or another system problem with your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if this message keeps appearing. 3-56 CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: Press RESET to acknowledge that you have read the message and to remove it from the display. The message will reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. You will hear two chimes when this message is displayed. If this message comes on while youare driving, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system. It could indicate that you have a loose or broken drive belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with the message on, be certain to turn off your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. TRACTION SYS ACTIVE: When your Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION SYS ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will stay on for a few seconds after the Traction Control System stops limiting wheel spin. TRACTION SYSTEM - ON: This message is displayed when you decide to turn on the Traction Control System by pressing the switch on the console. This message will shut off automatically on its own. TRACTION SYSTEM - OFF: You will hear a single quick tone when this message is displayed. This message comes on and stays on when the Traction Control System button on the console is pressed to turn the system off. To acknowledge this message, press RESET. SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will display together. You will never get a SHOCKS INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) message without a SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message. SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM: If the SERViCE TRACTION SYS message is displayed when you are driving, there is a problem with your Traction Control System and your vehicle is in need of service. When this message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. SHOCKS INOPERATIVE: You will hear four chimes when this message is displayed. To acknowledge that you have read the message and to remove it from the display, press RESET. The message will reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. The SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message will also be displayed and the instrument cluster car icon will also be illuminated. The driver can acknowledgeboth messages by pressing the reset button two times which will also turn off the instrument cluster icon. When the service messages are displayed, the computer controlled systems will not assist the driver in controlling the vehicle. Have the system repaired as soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordinulv. SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message is used to indicate to the driver that the Selective Ride Control system has detected a malfunction and that the system must be serviced. The SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message will always come on when a failure is detected by the Selective Ride Controi system. if a fauit is present in the Selective Ride Control system which causes the shocks to be in their full soft condition, the This message indicates that a malfunction is present in the Selective Ride Control system which is causing the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a warning to the driver that the vehicle handling may be affected. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h): You will hear four chimes when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press RESET, a message will reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. This message indicates that a malfunction is present in the selective real time damping system. The vehicle speed will be limited to 80 mph (129 km/h) when the shock absorber system has failed and the shocks -,-n in +hair 111 Snft mnrln Cla\/n \ ~ nIt-l \Inhirln conlipad -y y . l . - r - - FIG alc I I I L I I G I I soon as possible. $8 IUII UIL I I I V U ~ .I IUYU Jv'LII vvIIIvIv 3-57 COOLANT OVER TEMP: You will hear four chimes and the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press the RESET button. After you press the RESET button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a chime every minute until this condition changes. If you do not press RESET, the message will remain on the digital display until the condition changes. If the engine coolant exceeds 255°F (124"C), this message is displayed. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. You can monitor the coolant temperature with the GAGES button on the DIC or the engine coolant gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26. REDUCE ENGINE RPM: You will hear four chimes when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press the RESET button. After you press the RESET button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a chime every minute until this condition changes. If you do not press RESET, the message will remain on the digital display until the condition changes. If the engine oil temperature exceeds 320°F (16O"C), this message is displayed. You should check the engine coolant temperature and engine oil level. If your engine is too hot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26. 3-58 Your vehicle may need service, so see your dealer. You can monitor the oil temperature with the GAGES button on the DIC. HIGH TRANS TEMP (Automatic Transmission Only): You will hear four chimes when this message is displayed. To acknowledge this warning, press the RESET button. After you press the RESET button, the message will be displayed every 10 minutes until the condition changes. If you do not press RESET, the message remains on the display until the condition changes. If the transmission fluid temperature rises above 270°F (132°C) or rises rapidly, this message is displayed. The transmission may shift gears or apply the torque converter clutch to reduce the fluid temperature. Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher than normal. If this message appears, you may continue to drive at a slower speed. You should also monitor the transmission fluid temperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F (110°C). The transmission fluid temperature can be monitored with the GAGES button on the DIC. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-20. You should also check the engine coolant temperature. If it is also hot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26. If the HIGH TRANS TEMP message is displayed during normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may need service. See your dealer for an inspection. SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING: If the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message is displayed, there is a problem with your Active Handling System and your vehicle needs service. The instrument cluster light will also be on anda chime will sound. When this message is displayed, the system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly. Information Label. See Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-54 and Tire Pressure Monitor System ccept Z06) on page - 57. ACTIVE HANDLING: Your vehicle is equipped with a computer controlled system to assist the driver in controlling the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. You may feel or hear the system working and see the ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. This is normal when the system is operating. Also see Braking on page 4-6. en the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message is displayed on the Driver Information Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or others could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message is displayed. Drive cautiously and check your tire ressures as soon as you can. LOW TIRE PRESSURE (Except Z06): You will hear two chimes when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press RESET, a message will appear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. This message indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is less than 25 psi 14--.n 1 . n - 1 &#-.A I- \ I / L nral. ~ v e mL W I n \ n l TIT)^ T)T)CCCI L I I GL W V V I IIIL I I ILUUUI AI-- IL message, you can see either LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right rear) to indicate to you which tire is low on pressure. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press RESET. if a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your Tire Loading FLAT TIRE (Except ZO6): You will hear two chimes .is ulsplayr;u , - A L-11 -..,h,, +hW I I W I 11113 111e33aye IUIIUVVGU uy IG message MAX SPEED 55 MPH (90 km/h). If this message appears, do not drive your vehicle above this limit. The next message to appear is REDUCED HANDLING. Adjust your driving accordingly. To acknowledge these warnings, press RESET. After you press RESET, a message wiii reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. I- .. I!_:- -J:--l-. J-. LI 3-59 This message indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is lower than 5 psi (34 kPa). Next to the FLAT TIRE message, you can see either LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right rear) to indicate to you which tire is flat. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your Tire Loading Information Label. See Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-54 and Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page5-55. Whenthe LOV ’IRE F ESSUREor FLAT TIRE message is displayed on the Driver Information Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or others could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message is displayed. Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures as soon as you can. 3-60 HIGH TIRE PRESSURE - (LF, LR, RF, RR) (Except Z06): You will hear two chimes when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press RESET, a message will reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes. This message indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa). Next to the HIGH TIRE PRESSURE message, you can see either LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right rear) to indicate to you which tire is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa). You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your Tire Loading Information Label. See Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-54 and Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-55. SERVICE TIRE MON SYS (Except 206): If this message comes on, a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is not working properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of the foursensors are missingor inoperable, the warning will come onin approximately 10 minutes. If all four sensors are missing, the warning will come on in approximately 15 to 20 minutes. (All the sensors would be missing, for example, if you put different wheels on your vehicle without transferringthe sensors.) If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPM. See your dealer. Other Messages Here are more messages that you can receive on your Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a message and read another message that may have come on at the same time, press the RESET button. 0 BRAKEBEFORESHiFT (See “Automatic Transmissions Only” under Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-24.) 0 0 HATCHAJAR(Coupe) 0 CHANGE OILSOON 0 (See “Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.) CRUISE SET-MPH (-km/h) (See “Cruise Control” under Turn SignakM”unction Lever on page 3-6.) 0 DOORAJAR LOWBRAKEFLUID (See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-37.) 0 LOWFUEL (See Fuel Gage on page 3-42.) 0 LOWVOLTAGE (See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-34.) 0 (See “GM Oil Life SystemTM” under EngineOil on page 5- 13.) CRUISEDISENGAGED HIGH VOLTAGE (See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-34.) CHANGE OIL NOW (See “GM Oil Life SystemTM” under EngineOil on page 5-13.) ENGINEPROTECTIONREDUCEENGINERPM 0 LOW WASHER FLUID (See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36.) RESERVEFUEL (See Fuel Gage on page 3-42.) 0 TONNEAUAJAR (Convertible) TW!!K PJP,!? (Cc!?\.,s.tih!s!Z!E) UPSHIFTNOW (See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-27.) 3-61 Audio System(s) Notice; Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operationof sound equipment that has been added improperly. - So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio system even after the ignition is turned off. See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under lgnition Positions on page 2-20. Setting the Time Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears. 3-62 Radio with Cassette SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to increase the SCV. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Finding a Station Your vehicie is equipped with six Base@ amplified speakers. See your dealer for details. Playing the Radio PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume. RECALL: Press this button to switch the display between time and radio station frequency. Time display is available with the ignition turned off. AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI and FM2. The display will show your selection. TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it. r> 4 SEEK I Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station. To scan stations, press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. 3-63 The radio will seek or scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal. PSCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored on the pushbuttons for a few seconds. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. P.SCAN will appear on the display. Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets. The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the pushbutton. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Setting the Tone (BassKreble) Setting Preset Stations BASS: To adjust the bass, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease bass. The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps: TREB (Treble): To adjust the treble, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM FM to select AM, FM1 or FM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected. Return these knobs to their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for countqdwestern, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical stations. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, either press and release the AUTO TONE button until the display goes blank or press and release theBASS or TREB knob and turn it until the display goes blank. 3-64 Adjusting the Speakers (BallanceIFade) BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers. Return these knobs to their stored positions when you’re not using them. Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. If a tape is inserted when the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing. A tape symbol is shown in the center of the graphic display 1:;heze\.fer E! tsgn !s i!?serted. !/\!he!? E! t q e IC =ICtI?IP, the l accompanied by a direction tape symbol w ~ l be arrow. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted. The display wiii show the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over. The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the last station selected. The player automatically senses the cassette for metal or CrO 2 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected to play first. If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape Messages’’ later in this section. 1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous selection on the tape if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current selection. 2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to play tne other side of the tape. 3 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. if you noia this pushbutton or press it More than once, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. 3-65 4 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play while the tape reverses. 00 5 (Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce background noise. The double-D symbol will appear on the display. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. FWD 6 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play while the tape advances. 4 SEEK D : Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for seek to work. Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous selection on the tape. AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing. TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a cassette tape when listening to the radio. The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display while the tape is active. If your system is equipped with a remote playback device, pressing this button a second time will allow the remote device to play. 3-66 EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT maybe used with the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may beloaded with theradio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave acassette tape in the player while listening to the radio,it may become warm. Cassette Tape Messages CLN (Clean): If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-77. CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player. To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the featureis active. 4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power up the radio and begin playing. The override feature will remain active until EJECT is pressed. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to increase the SCV. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don't want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Radio with CD Finding a Station AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection. Your vehicle is equipped with six 5ose@amplified speakers. See your dealer for details. Playing the Radio PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. 5 I A D 1\1-1__-_ \. V U L \VVlUlllc~. .._- &I^- T I UIII LIIG I,--h I.,. n l ~ u uL W ;mAcncIc.e T\r I I I ~ I G U J Z IV I trr LV decrease volume. RECALL: Press this button to switch the display between time and radio station frequency. Time display is available with the ignition turned off. SCV (Speed-Compensated Voiumej: 'viiiiih SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it. a SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station. To scan stations, press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The radio will seek or scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signai. 3-67 P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored on the pushbuttons for a few seconds. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. PSCAN will appear on the display. Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected. pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the pushbutton. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton. Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) BASS: To adjust the bass, press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the knob to increaseor to decrease bass. TREB (Treble): To adjust the treble, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Return these knobs to their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical stations. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, either press and release the AUTO TONE button until the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or TREB knob and turn it until the display goes blank. 3-68 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. Return these knobs to their stored positions when you’re not using them. Playing a Compact Disc Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The display will show CD and the CD symbol. If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press RECALL or EJECT. If an error appears on the display, see ‘Compact Disc Messages” later in this section. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds, it wiii go to the beginning of the current track. if you haid this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. 2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random order, rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play. Random is reset to off when the disc is ejected. 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc. REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can use the counter reading on the display to locate a passage easily. FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly advance within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can use the counter reading on the display to locate a passage easily. a SEEK D : Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or to the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to tne start oi tne next track. i i eirher arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. RECALL: Press this button to see which track is playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how iong it has been playiiig (elapsed t h e ) . The track number will also appear when you change the volume or when a new track starts to play. 3-69 AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. CD will appear on the display when a disc is in the player, whether it is active or not. If your system is equipped with a remote playback device, pressing this button a second time will allow the remote device to play. EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. The radio will play. EJECT may be used with the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first. If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the ignition or radio, the disc will start playing where it was stopped. If you press EJECT but do not remove the disc, the player will pull the disc back in to protect it after about one minute. If you leave the CD in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm. Compact Disc Messages ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display, and/or the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the disc should play. 0 It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the disc should play. 3-70 The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. Press RECALL to make ERR go off of the display. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, contact your dealer. Trunk-Mounted CD Changer If your vehicle has the optional trunk-mounted CD changer it is located in the rear center storage compartment. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-47 for more information. With the trunk-mounted CD changer you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine. The small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays. Notice: Heavy objects in the center storage area which may shift or slide while driving could damage your CD changer. Protect your CD changer by not placing heavy, moveable objects in the center storage area. You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side dc;;z. !f ycz 2 disc la5e! si& El, fhe +kc \!il not play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine. Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine. 3-71 magazine for CDs, the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play. When 3 CD begins playing, CD will appear in the bottom left corner and a disc and track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine. All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio pushbuttons except for ejecting the magazine. Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer with the AM-FM Radio with Cassette If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc Messages” later in this section. Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the door is left partially open, the changer will not operate and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue for up to two minutes depending on the number of discs loaded. To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD changer door all the way open. The magazine will automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer. Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer, the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the 3-72 The following pushbuttons are used for the trunk-mounted CD changer. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track. If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. 2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to select the next disc in the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number will be skipped when selecting discs while using this pushbutton. 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to advance to the next track. If you press and hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc. REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly reverse within a track. Release this pushbutton to resume play. 00 5 (Dolby): This pushbutton has no function when playing a CD. FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly advance within a track. Release this pushbutton to resume play. RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press it a third time and the time of day will be displayed. SEEK b : The left arrow works the same as the PREV pushbutton and the right arrow works the same as the NEXT pushbutton. <1 PSCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to play the compact discs in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display. Press this button again to turn off random play. AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a cassette tape or a compact disc. TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. You can also press this button to switch between playing a tape in the cassette tape player and playing a CD in the trunk-mounted CD changer, if both are loaded. Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer with the AM-FM Radio with CD If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc Messages” later in this section. The following pushbuttons are used for the trunk-mounted CD changer. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track. If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. 2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to play the compact discs in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play. 3-73 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to advance to the next track. If you press and hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc. REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly reverse within a track. Release this pushbutton to resume play. 5: Press this pushbutton to select the next disc in the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number will be skipped when selecting discs while using this pushbutton. FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly advance within a track. Release this pushbutton to resume play. RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press it a third time and the time of day will be displayed. a SEEK D : The left arrow works the same as the CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. You can also press this button to switch between playing a CD in the compact disc player and playing a CD in the trunk-mounted CD changer, if both are loaded. Compact Disc Messages If an error occurs while trying to play a CD in the compact disc player or changer, the following conditions may have caused the error: e You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the disc should play. e The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. e The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. The CD changer door is open. Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation. e An empty magazine is in the CD changer. Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays. PREV pushbutton and the right arrow works the same as the NEXT pushbutton. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a compact disc. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. 3-74 Theft-Deterrent Feature 3. Turn the radio off. THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is interrupted. 4. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time. Hold them down until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down. The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. 5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate. 7 . Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. Read through all nine steps before starting the procedure. ii you seC"i?ds U ; &+SE ~ ~ K E any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4. 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition on. aiiuw I ~ ~ u r tiiklhii : 75 6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 8. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code. 9. Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. E Z 3-75 Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display. 2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure. If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears. If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display. 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is no longer secured. If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. When battery power is removed and later appliedto a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display. To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. 3-76 are sf Your C ssette Tape Player AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. F FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with paas wnicn scrub ine ‘rape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership. 3-77 The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds. 4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time. After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the cut tape detection feature will be active again. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is not recommended. After you clean the player, press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. 3-78 Care of Your CDs Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Care of Your CD Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. Fixed Mast Antenna (Z06) The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it. Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened to the rear quarter panel. Power Antenna Mast Care (Convertible) Your power antenna will look its best and work well if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast do the following: 1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna. 2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or equivalent solvent. 3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing any dirt. 4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth. 5. Make the antenna go gp and down by turning the radio or ignition off and on. 6. Repeat if necessary. Notice: Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication could damage it. Notice: Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off your radio to make the power antenna go down. This will prevent the mast from possible damage. If the antenna does not go down when you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the antenna by hand by carefully pressing the antenna down. If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit and follow the instructions in the kit. Integrated Windshield and Rear Window Antennas (Coupe) The antennas in your vehicle are located in the windshield and the rear window. The front connector is at the top of the windshield and the rear antenna is incorporated in the rear window defogger grid. 3-79 NOTES 3-80 Section 4 DrivingYourVehicle Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle .......... 4-2 Defensive Driving ........................................... 4-2 Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-2 Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-5 Braking ......................................................... 4-6 Traction Control System (TCS) ......................... 4-9 Active Handling System ................................. 4-10 Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................... 4-11 Selective Ride Control ........................ ....4-12 Steering ...................................................... 4-13 Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-15 Passing ....................................................... 4-15 Loss of Control ............................................. 4-17 Driving at Night ............................................ 4-18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads .................. 4-19 City Driving .................................................. 4-22 Freeway Driving ........................................... 4-23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-24 Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4-25 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-25 Winter Driving ............................................. -4-27 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .............................................. 4-32 Towing .......................................................... 4-33 Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... 4-33 Recreational Vehicle Towing .......................... 4 3 3 Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4-33 Towing a Trailer ........ ........................ 4-35 4- 1 Defensive Driving telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life. The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Drunken Driving Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-7. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular 4-2 Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAG) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: 0 The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker’s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking 0 The lenath “ of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (i20 mij giasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces (45 mi) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. it’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drankthree double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level. 4-3 There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. 4-4 Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. ‘‘I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgement can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious-or even fatal-collision if you drive after drinking. Please don’t drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have io a0 ineir work ai ine piaces wilere ii~eiifes rr~eei the road. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control ot your venicie. Aiso see Tracrion Coniroi System (TCS) on page 4-9 and Active Handling System on page 4-10. 4-5 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal. r If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page3-36. Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam .- - ..- -. Imat; a .V.V.I^ -L VI I LI ~t: U I Q K ~ QI~IU LVI ILII IUG UIQRII ~ y . I la1 .- 11- I_ I -1 -I .-l!.-. I . I^ I-?.- I ^I^ 9- happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel. 4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal move a little during a stop, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. 4-8 Traction Control System (TCS) Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCS that limits wheel spin. Thisis especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power (by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION SYS ACTIVE message will come on when the TCS system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on nane 3-6 - ~-a I- ' D -i The SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message and the TCS warning light will come on to let you know if there's a problem with your TCS system. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message are on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. The TCS system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the TCS system off if vou ever need to. 4-9 To turn the system off, press the button located on the console. You can turn the system on or off at any time by pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button. The DIC will display the appropriate message when you push the button. Active Handling System The Active Handling System is a computer controlled system that helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is accomplished by selectively applying any one of the vehicle’s brakes. When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away (6 mph (10 km/h)), the message ACT HNDLG WARMING UP may be displayed in the DIC, the instrument cluster light will be on,and a chimewill sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET button. TheActive Handling System performance is affected until the message, WARM UP COMPLETE,is displayed in the DIC. 4-10 The ACT HNDLG WARMING UP message may be displayed in the DIC after exceeding 12 mph (20 km/h) for 30 seconds. The Active Handling System is off until the WARM UP COMPLETE message is displayed. The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when the system is operating. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53 for more information. You may also feel or hear the system working. This is normal. The SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message will be displayed, the instrument cluster light will come on, and a chime will sound to let you know if there is a problem with the system. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message are on, the system is not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly. The Active Handling System comes on automatically whenever you start your vehicle. To help maintain directional control of the vehicle, you should always leave the system on. You can turn the system off if you ever need to. If you turn the Active Handling System off, the Traction Control System will also be turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. To turn the system off, press the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the console. You can turn the system on and off at any time by pressing the button. The DIC will display the appropriate message when you push the button. Competitive Driving Mode The driver can select this optional handling mode by pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the console for more than five seconds. Competitive Driving mode allows the driver to have full control of the rear wheels while the Active Handling System helps steer the vehicle by selective brake application. The instrument cluster light will not be on. The Traction Control System will not be operating. Adjust your driving accordingly. When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING button again, or turn the ignition to ACC, the Active Handling and Traction Control Systems will be on. The TRAC/ACT HNDLG-ON message will be displayed temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard. Limited-Slip Rear Axle Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like - -t-mJnvJ CA J L U l I U U I u ~ v l n m n . 4 nf +hn + ; m n U * I G I II V d L V I LI I\r ,,I I h n n + ,e,U U L t n r h n n -no “ 1 1 I”, I V I I” nf v a the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle. 4-1 1 Selective Ride Control This knob is located on the center console. Turn it to select the suspension of your choice. You may have a ride control system on your vehicle called Selective Ride Control. The system provides the following performance benefits: TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving. This setting provides a smooth, soft ride. 0 Reduced Impact Harshness ImprovedRoad Isolation Improved High-speed Stability 0 Improved Handling Response 0 Better Control of Body Ride Motions SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal preference demand more control. This setting provides more “feel”, or response to the road conditions. You can select a setting at any time. Based on road conditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed, the system automatically adjusts to provide the best ride and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving conditions change. There are three Driver Information Center (DIC) messages that are displayed when a malfunction occurs with the Selective Ride Control system. Refer to DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53. 4-12 Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering Your vehicle is equipped with a steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds. Steering Tips Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems - steering and acceleration - have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. If vou need to reduce vour speed as vou approach a cu-rve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 4-1 3 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-14 Off-Road Recovery Passing You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: 0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the righi front tire zorttacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. 4-15 Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. 4-1 6 If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. Loss of Control Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornermg sKIU, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If your TCS system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery zr?ti!p ~ !wr h i ~is! skirldin2~ ~ !Learn tn recngni7e warnin9 clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a ”mirrored surface” - and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. A cornering skid Is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. 4-17 Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving. Drive defensively. 0 Don’t drink and drive. Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. .:I In remote areas, watch for animals. If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. I Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-18 No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren’t even aware of it. Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are dri\fiflg. The surface mall get lAjet sudden[)/ \.!!./hen )/Q!Jr reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 4-19 The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. Wet brakes can cause acc s. 3y wo-. work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. . After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. 4-20 Hydroplaning Driving Through Flowing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. forces. If you tryto drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure is one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice: ii you drive io0 quickiy ihrougir deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips 0 0 Besides slowina down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-53. 4-21 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: 0 Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the next part, “Freeway Driving.” Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. 4-22 Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnplKes or supernignwaysj are ine safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your snouider io make s u r e iilere isrl’i a ~ l u i i -dl ~ -~ ~ ~k ii-1k your “blind” spot. 4-23 Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. 4-24 Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it. Here are some things you can check before a trip: Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservior full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? Hill and Mountain Roads Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehiclethat can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and t~ t h $nc. ~ \In1lr J --.. r ~ a p / i ~ \mirrnrc A/ 3nri ynl lr instruments frequently. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from .11-1 rI 1I- r~ UL C IUIIII ._ ~y LCI.*..-:la11 I. Lirivil ly III.- -. I _ If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-25 If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. 0 If you don’t =,lift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. 4-26 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill better. * Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane Winter Driving roads in hills or mountains. Don't swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As vou ao over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. v e You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Here are some tips for winter driving: * Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. * You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. 4-27 Driving On Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. I Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. 4-28 However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow - drive with caution. Keep your traction control system on. It improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has the TCS system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. The Active Handling System may also activate. See Traction Control system (TCS) on page 4-9 and Active Handling system on page 4-10. Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. 9 Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. 4-29 If You're Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you've been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats - anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: 0 Turn on your hazard flashers. 4-30 I / . I . . . . . You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind.This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. 4-31 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution. If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transmission or other partsof the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 25 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. Nofice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-64. 4-32 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn your TCS System off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. For a manual transmission, shift slowly between either FIRST(1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), allowing the wheels to stop before shifting into gear. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” following. Towing Loading Your Vehicle Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5. Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”). Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be rowed, see “Towing Your venicie“ eariier in inis seciiorl. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and inc!r_desthe weight of a!! occc!pantsj cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. 4-33 MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Don’t carry more than 100 Ibs. (45 kg) in your rear area. Do notyourvehicle an) ..2avier thanthe GVWR, or either the maximum front orrear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. 4-34 Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading. If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages or anythingelse - they will go as fast as thevehiclegoes. If youhave to stop or turn quickly, c therecrash, isthey’ll a keeF --ling. *‘ Towing a Trailer Your Corvette is neither designednor intended to towa trailer. Things you put inside ur vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Put things in the reararea of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. 3 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicleso that some of them are above the tops of the seats. 0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. 0 When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. 4-35 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Service .................................... .........5.3 DoingYourOwnServiceWork ..... .............5.4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ........................................... 5-4 Fuel ................................................................5.5 Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5.5 Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5.5 California Fuel ............................................... 5.6 Additives ..................................................... - 5 - 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................... 5.6 Filling Your Tank ............................................ 5-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................... 5.9 Checking Things Under the Hood ....................................................5-10 Hood Release .............................................. 5.11 Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5.12 Engine Oil ................................................... 5.13 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................ 5.18 Automatic Transmission Fluid ......................... 5.20 Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5.20 Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... -5-22 Engine Coolant ............................................. 5.23 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26 Engine Overheating ....................................... 5.26 Cooling System ............................................ 5.29 Power Steering Fluid ................................... -5-35 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................ 5-36 Brakes ........................................................ 5-37 Battery ....................................................... 5-40 Jump Starting .............................................. -5-41 Rear Axle ...................................................... -5-46 Bulb Replacement .......................................... 5.47 Halogen Bulbs .............................................. 5.47 Headlamps ..................................................5.47 Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps ...................5-49 Back-up Lamps ............................................ 5-51 Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5.51 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5.52 Tires .............................................................. 5.54 Extended Mobility Tires I~.----A 7nc\ [LAbGpl L U V ) ............................................. 3 C C A - J ~ Inflation ..Tire Pressure ................................5-56 Tire Pressure Monitor System (Except Z06) ......5.57 Tire Rotation ................................................ 5.58 Buying New Tires ......................................... 5.59 Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................... 5.60 5- 1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-61 Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-61 Tire Chains .................................................. 5-64 Lifting Your Corvette ..................................... 5-64 If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-68 Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Only) ............................. 5-70 Appearance Care ............................................ 5-75 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................. 5-75 Care of Safety Belts ...................................... 5-77 Weatherstrips ............................................... 5-77 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ......................................... 5-78 Finish Damage .................. .................... 5-81 Magnesium Wheel Finish ............................... 5-81 Underbody Maintenance .......................... 5-81 Titanium Exhaust System (Z06 Only) ........................................ 5-81 Fiberglass Springs ....................................... 5-81 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................ 5 - 8 1 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...........5-82 5-2 Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5.83 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-83 Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 5.83 Electrical System ........................................ 5.84 Add-on Electrical Equipment ...................... 5.84 Accessory Power Plug .................. .....5.84 Headlamp Wiring ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-85 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................... .....5.85 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...................................... 5.85 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................ 5.86 Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-92 Capacities and Specifications ......................... 5.92 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .......... 5-94 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .......... 5.94 Service We hope you'll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you'll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You'll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. 5-3 Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10. Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 7-47 before attempting to do your own service work. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page6-15. You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try todo service work on a vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts canlater break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. 5-4 Fuel Gasoline Specifications Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline. Gasoline Octane Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 91 or higher for best performance. You may also use middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. In Canada, look for the “Auto Makers’ Choice” label on the pump. 5-5 California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-38 ) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Additives To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to your fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. 5-6 Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving. Filling Your Tank &%qq p &?**",, _. ,2,L*L . .. " Fuel vapor is higllly flammable. li burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don't smoke if you're near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel. The fuel filler door is located on the driver's side of the vehicle. The fuel cap is attached by a tether for your convenience. 5-7 The fuel filler door release button is located inside of the center console storage Compartment. If your fuel filler door release won’t operate, there is a manual release tab. The tab is located against the upper trim on the driver’s side in the rear compartment. Pull the tab to manually release the fuel filler door. While refueling, rest the tether across the tab on the fuel filler door to prevent damage to your vehicle’s finish. To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right. 5-8 This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. If you get fuel on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the duel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tankis nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-78. When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-38. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type, Your dea!er can get one for you; If you get the wrongtype, it may not fit properly. Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others: e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. e Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, i n a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. 0 Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. e unnn’+ m~ n nuvlnnnrrkiln nnnmninm u n n c ~unuk-z punnnpnnny y a s ~ l i ~ . N 5-9 Checking Things Under the Hood An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan. 5-10 Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids likefuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release Notice: In order to avoid possible contact of the hood to the headlamp doors, either take care in raising the hood with the headlamps up, or turn off the headlamps prior to opening the hood. To open the hood, do the following: 1. Pull the handle located inside the vehicle below the instrument panel on the driver’s side. 2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear edge of the hood, near the windshield. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and close it firmly. 5-1 1 0 rc 3 m 3 P, v 3 0 0 CD 3 I . (P CD I . z s < s 8 CD CD v) (D Q 0 0 5 CD 4 S CD -u 0 S Y 0 5 z rn 3 A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap B. Battery C.Engine Oil Dipstick D.Engine Oil Fill Cap E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir G. Brake Fluid Reservoir H. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It’s a good idea to check your engine oil level every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow ring located near the coolant surge tank. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5- 72 for more information on location. If the LOW OIL LEVEL message on the Driver Information Center comes on, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away. For more information, see Driver Information Center @IC) on page 3-44. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or a cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down. 5-13 The engine oil fill cap is located in the engine compartment on top of the valve cover on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Ovetview on page 5-12 for more information on location. I I When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-89. See “Racing or Other Competitive Driving’’ under Starting Your Engine on page2-21 for additional information on engine oil. Notices Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper Operating range, your engine could be damaged. 5-14 Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you’re through. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things: 0 GM4718M Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M. Notice: If you use oils that don’t have the GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty. SAE 5W-30 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1O-W30 if it’s going to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 2OW-50. LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL HQT WEATHER Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). L 1 1 1 r IWJ SAE 5W.-30 RECOMMENDED SAE IOW-30 ACCEPTABLE IF 5W-30 IS NOT AVAILABLE COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SA€ 20W-50 OR ANY OTHER V!SCOS!rv GRADE O!L NOT RECOMMENDED V - I 8 - ,-hn.nlrl I n n L vu 3 , l v u l u IVWI\ f e w IWI , rrnrl th;e n m thn n i l r.nntq;nnr L I llcl “I I L I I” VI, ”VI # L u l l I”, UI t u mlrn uvv only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard 4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a bd&il p c \ r n t h a t i r ’ nil I n r h i p h mnntc 3 1 1 rnnt t i r a m a n t c your vehicle. O y l I L I I b L I W VII, V V I I I W I I IllL,L,,cl UBI IL,yuII”II#uIIL“ fnr (“I 5-15 Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M may not be available. You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures. If temperatures are above 0°F (-18"C), you may substitute SAE 1OW-30 with the starburst symbol. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change. Engine Oil Additives Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil Life SystemTM) Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. 5-16 When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. a CHANGE OIL SOON message will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Change Oil Soon Message The GM Oil Life SystemTMcalculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system. To reset the CHANGE OIL SOON message after an oil change, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off. 2. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentage is displayed. 3. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OIL LIFE REMAIN 100% will appear. What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. 5-17 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Operating the engine withthe air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops flame if the engine backfires.If it isn’t there and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working off. on the engine with the air cleanedfilter The engine air cleaner/filter is located at the center front of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 to determine when to replace the air filter. 5-18 Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire.And, dirt can easily get into yourengine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Replacement To remove the engine air cleaner/filter: 2. Pull the assembly out. 3. Replace the filter. See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 5-94. 1. Pull up on the clips on each side to release the assembly. 4. Push the assembly back into place. K. v FQCtnn tha U V L V . . .I.- Plinc -*tr-- 5-19 Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer service department and have it repaired as soon as possible. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult, you should have this done at your dealer service department. Contact your dealer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10. Notices We recommend yu use only fluid labeled DEXRON@111, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatictransmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@111 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. 5-20 Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (80 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one of these conditions: In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. High performanceoperation. If you do not use your vehicle under one of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 100,000 miles (166 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for the proper service intervals for the transmission fluid and filter. Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t require changing. How to Check Then, follow these steps: Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose to have this done at your dealership service department. If you do it yourself, besure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. CJCCC!, inst?!! the F!L!cJ 2nd he SL!!? it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. 3. !?the flnirl !s?re!k 5-2 1 How to Add Fluid When to Check and What to Use Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 13. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated. 4. Tighten the plug to 20 Ib ft (27 N*m ). Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic fluid. It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. 5-22 The clutch master cylinder reservoir is located at the rear of the engine compartment on the driver’s side. See Engine Compartment Overview on page5-12 for more information on location. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-7 and Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 13. How to Check and Add Fluid Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOLa engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL@ extendedlife coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL@)coolant will: 0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Fluid should be added if the fluid level is below the step on the inside of the reservoir. There are additional instructions on the reservoir cap. Put the rubber seal ana cap back on. See Engine Zomparimeni Zlverview on page 5-12 for more information on location. 0 Protect against rust and corrosion. 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they -L-. .lA 3 1 IUUIU. 5-23 Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOL@is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner -- at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant. Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture canfreeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system.These can be harmful. 5-24 Checking Coolant Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure cap - even a little - when the engine and radiator are hot. The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark. The FULL COLD mark is on the front of the coolant surge tank. Don't overfill the surge tank. Too much coolant can result in an overflow when the fluid is hot. The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment behind the passenger's side headlamp. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more intormation on locatlon. 5-25 Adding Coolant Engine Overheating If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool. You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the instrument panel cluster and a COOLANT OVER TEMP message on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-38 and DlC Warnings and Messages on page3-53. r Youcan bc urnedyou I- II coolantonhot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice: Your pressure cap is a pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. See “Capacities and Specifications” for more information. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for information on location. 5-26 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the messages COOLANT OVER TEMP and REDUCED ENGINE POWER are displayed, along with the Check Engine light, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km). Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attemptingany repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system.See “Engine Oil” in the Index. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an ove eated engine can b n you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. dust turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle untilit cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. ... If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency. i Nofice: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode“in the index for to a safe placein an information on driving emergency. 5-27 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stopafter high-speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. 5-28 If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues and you are not stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in this section. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see: r tne nood An elec :tric engine cooling fan undeN can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans B. Coolant Surge Tank 5-29 Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. 5-30 If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as you use onlyDEX-COOL~(silicate-free) coolant. follows: If coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine - at 30,000 miles coolant will require change sooner (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling Damage caused by the use of coolant other system can blow out and burn you badly. They than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap-- even a little -- they How to Add Coolant to the Coolant can come out at highspeed. Never turn the Surge Tank cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if for the cooling system and coolant surge tank coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD mark on the the pressure cap. coolant surge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more information. 5-31 Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn't getthe overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL@ coolant. Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. Adding only plai Mater to ur cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. I I CAUTION: (Continued) I You can be bul Id i' ou spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hotengine. I 5-32 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter turn and then stop. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it. 5-33 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan(s). By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank. 5-34 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. 0 When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the HOT mark. When the engine compartment is cool, the level should be at the FULL COLD mark. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly checkpower steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D: Recommended Fiukis and iubsicanis on page 8-13. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. 5-35 Windshield Washer Fluid a When using concentrated washer fluid, follow What to Use the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If youwill be operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use afluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine Compartment Overview on page5- 12 for reservoir location. Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. 5-36 Notice: e Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution freeze to and damage yourwasher fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.Also, water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint. Brakes Brake Fluid The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. i Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. It is filled with UWT-3 brake iiuia. See Engine Gompanmenr zlverview on page 5-12. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake ini in^Y ‘ A ‘ P = I Y . Wher! new !inings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. If you have too mu -.‘akc _ _ 1, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic !vMik17ance i17specihs 017 page 6- i 1. 5-37 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. ‘ith the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not workwell, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks. What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. Notice: Using the wrong fluid can badlydamage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have tobe replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. 0 5-38 If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. Brake Wear Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-12. Brake Pedal Travel The'akewearwar lg sot 1 meansthat soon your brakes won't work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment As you make brake stops, your disc brakes automatically adjust for wear. Z06 models are equipped with high performance front brake linings designed for improved brake performance under severe use. They will normally exhibit some low speed noise and you may notice an increase in the amount of brake dust. 5-39 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system - for example, when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco@battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco@ battery. For battery replacement, see your dealer or the service manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service and Owner Publications in Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10. 5-40 Warnings Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Vehicle Storage If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. Batteries have acidthatcan burn u andgas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent Feature on page 3-75. Jump Starting If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to fo” N the steps below to do it safely. I L t e r i e s ca.. .wrt you. They can be _._ingerous because: They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can explode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. @ If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notices If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brakes. Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off LL- LI it; Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Tryingto start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. --A:- --A lauiu ai IU ---‘pa ,I1 I all la1 I -___ 4L-& l + ,,,JIJ Th:11l a 1 a l c i l I L I IGGUGU. I I 1 1 3 ... ;II YVIII avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save your radio! 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. 5-41 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. battery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. elect. _ _ fan can st,. - up even when the engine is not running and can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. n m Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. I I I - C-. a ma 1 near altterycancausebattery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco@ battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a CAUTION: (Continued) 5-42 Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engineis running. 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 5-43 7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goesto a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative(-) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 5-44 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. = Nofice: Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care that the cables don’t touch each other or any other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. B\ I Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part B. GoodBattery C. DeadBattery 5-45 Rear Axle To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6- 1 1. How to Check Lubricant 5-46 What to Use To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meeting GM Specification 99861 15. Tocompletely refill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive (GM Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulb, see Bulb Replacement on page5-47. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service department. Headlamps 1. The headlamp doors need to be halfway open. Turn the headlamps on, then quickly back to the parking lamps setting. You may have to do this a few times to get the half-open position. Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. You can also open the headlamp doors manually by turning the adjuster counterclockwise. 5-47 2. Remove the screws on each side of the headlamp bezel. 3. Open the hood. 4. To remove the bezel, pull the sides slightly outward and tilt the bezel forward. Pull the clip centered above the lens outward. Be careful not to scratch the paint on the vehicle. 5-48 5. Reach behind the lamp and turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. Don’t touch the halogen bulbs. The inner bulb is the high beam and the outer bulb is the low beam. 6. Disconnect the desired bulb from the wiring harness. 7. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb. Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps 1. Remove the screws. 2. Pull the taillamp housing assembly out. A. Back-up Lamp B. Inboard Taillamp C. Outboard Taillamp 5-49 3. To remove the socket with the bulb, squeeze the tab while you turn the socket counterclockwise. 5-50 4. Remove the bulb from the socket. 5. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb. Back-up Lamps Replacement Bulbs You can access the back-up lamps through the inboard taillamp opening. See Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps on page 5-49. 1. Squeeze the tab on the socket while turning it counterclockwiseto remove it from the assembly. 2. Remove the bulb from the socket. 3. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb. For any bulb replacements or procedures not listed here, please consult your dealer. 5-51 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear orcracking. See “Wiper Blade Check under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-7 for more information. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For the proper type and length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 5-9 I. It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly every six months. Notice: Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm to fall back and strike the windshield. To remove the wiper blade assembly, do the following: 1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshield wipers. 2. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position. A. Blade Assembly B. ArmAssembly C. Locking Tab D. BladePivot E. HookSlot F.ArmHook 3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to release it from the wiper arm hook (F). 4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A). The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notch end, pull the insert from the blade assembly. 5-52 3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot. To install the new wiper insert: 4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield. A Installation guide: E3 ,D A 1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end with the two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end (B). Plastic caps (C) will be forced off as the :.---.A I- 1. -11. . : - - * - 1 1 - ^I I I I ~ GL I 13 rully II I 3 t a l l t ; u . 2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom claws. Make sure thatall other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slots. C A. Claw in Notch n r- + I--+-II-+:-- -I--- D. b U l I t X L II I ~ l i l l l d l l UI I C. Incorrect Installation 5-53 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Ct- rolet V ’ rranty booklet for details. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. CAUTION: 5-54 (Continued) 0 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact - such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) Your vehicle, when new, had Goodyear Extended Mobility Tires (EMT). There’s no spare tire, no tire changing equipment and no place to store a tire in the vehicle. Extended Mobility Tires perform so well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure. If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side of the road to change the tire. You canjust keep on driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated EMT for50 miles (80 km) or less and at speeds of55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that the tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectively with no air pressure for up to 200 miles (320 km) at speeds upto 55 mph (90 km/h), a is but thetire would then have to be replaced. When tire filled with air,it provides a cushion between the road and the wheel. Because you won’t have this cushion when driving on adeflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel andrequire replacement of it. Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair. This damage could occur even before you’ve driven on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been damaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on a deflated EMT, check with an authorized Goodyear EMT Service Center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s extended mobility feature, all replacement tires must be Extended Mobility Tires. As soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM or Goodyear EMT servicing facility for inspection and repair or replacement. To locate the nearest GM or Goodyear EMT servicing facility, call Roadside Assistance. Fsr phsne nE!?hers 2nd REdSidf? .A.ssistsnce dPf?!l!S see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5. You may also contact Goodyear, for the nearest authorized EMT servicing facility, by calling 1-800-789-9878. Exl,. .ded mobili,., tires are cons,. Jcted differently than other tires and could explode during improper service. You or others could be injured or killed if you attempt to repair, replace, dismount, or mount an extended mobility tire. Let only an authorized Goodyear EMT Service Center repair, replace, dismount and mount extended mobility tires. The valve stems on your extended mobility tires have sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM). See Tire Pressure Monitor System (Except Z06) on page 5-57. These sensors contain batteries which are designed to last for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your dealer if you ever need to have a wheel replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement. Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensorsin your extended mobility tires. This damage would not be covered by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants in your extended mobility tires. 5-55 If you feel that winter tires are needed for your driving conditions, Goodyear Eagle M+S EMT tires are available in your original equipment sizes from an authorized Goodyear EMT retailer. These tires will improve snow traction while maintaining your vehicle’s extended mobility feature. When using winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use them on all four wheels. See Buying New Tires on page 5-59. If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following: Inflation -- Tire Pressure When to Check The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following: Too muchflexing Too muchheat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fueleconomy 5-56 Unusual wear Badhandling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards Check your tires once a month or more. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor, you can check tire inflation pressures while driving. After you’ve reached a speed of 15 mph (24 kmh) or more, press and release the GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC) until the front tire pressures are displayed. Then, press and release the GAGES button for the rear tire pressures. If the display doesn’t showtire pressure, or if the SERVICE TIRE MON SYS message appears see your dealer for service. For more information, see Tire Pressure Monitor System (Except Z06) on page 5-57 and Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Tire Pressure Monitor System (Except Z06) Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) has a sensor on each road wheel that transmits to a receiver on the instrument panel. If a tire’s inflation pressure is between 5 psi (35 kPa) and 25 psi (170 kPa), you will see a message on the Driver Information Center. This message will show which tire is underinflated and two chimes will sound. An example would be LOW TIRE PRESSURE-LR. This would mean that the inflation pressure in your left rear tire is between 5 psi (35 kPa) and 25 psi (170 kPa). If the inflation pressure in the tire drops below 5 psi (35 kPa), the message would read FLAT TIRE-LR and four chimes will sound. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44. The system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry and Science Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operaiion. The TPM will also alert you if a tire’s nressure is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa). The message will show which tire is overinflated and two chimes will sound. An example would be HIGH PRESSURE-LR. This would mean that the inflation pressure in your left rear tire is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa). See Driver Information Center p ! q o!? p g e 2-44. 5-57 If a tire pressure message appears on the Driver Information Center, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your Tire-Loading Information label. See inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-56. en th .OW TIRE PRESSUREor FLAT TIRE message is displayed on the Driver Information Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or others could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check your tire pressures as soon as you can. When It’s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. \ You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. Tire Rotation The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear. Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire and wheel should be used only in the position it is in. 5-58 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Tire-Loading Information label. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. the vehicle m - not handle p -)erly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on your vehicle) may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size and type tires on all four wheels. If your vehicle is equipped with Extended Mobility Tires and you feel that winter tires are needed, see Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z--’ I page 5-54. I Mix..-d tires could cause yo-. _ _ .--e con-. -11 while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on your vehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires), If you use bias-1 _..‘eson your v t cle, the ... wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. I CAUTION: (Continued) 5-59 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. 5-60 Traction - AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature - A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Yollr dealer will know the kind nf wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. 5-6 1 If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. I Using the wrong re1 cement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control.You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. 5-62 Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after atime. The wheel could come off and cause a crash.When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places In an where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might come loose and thewheel could fall off, causing a crash. 1 Magnesium Wheels I Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly llyhtened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the whee! nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. Notice: If your vehicle has magnesium wheels, moisture on or around the mounting surface of the magnesium wheel will cause corrosion and damage to the wheel. To help prevent this, a magnesium wheel has two rubber O-rings. One goes on the inboard side of the wheel and the other on the back of the center hubcap. When you put a magnesium wheel backon, be sure the O-rings are correctly installed. On the inboard side, work the O-ring into the groove. When properly installed, this O-ring fits snugly. The other O-ring goes around the edge of the center cap. Used Replacement Wheels I Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. 5-63 Tire Chains Don’tusetire .,..IS. Therc notenough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amountof clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires. 5-64 -- Lifting Your Corvette Lifting a veh-- - e can cause an injury.The vehicle can slip off the jack and rollover you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place tolift your vehicle. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). Turn off the engine. 3. Turn off the engine. To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks in frontof and behind the wheels. If you ever use a jack to lift your Corvette, such as to display it at a show, follow the instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle. Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked upis dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty.To lift your vehicle properly, follow the advice inthis part. To help prevent vehicle damage: I * 0 Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to place the jack in the proper location before raising the vehicle. 0 Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle. Make sure the jack you’re using spans at least two crossmem ber ribs. Lift only in the areas shown in the following pictures. For additional information, see your dealer and the Chevrolet Corvette service manual. 5-65 Lifting From the Front A The front lifting point can be accessed for either the driver’s or passenger’s side of the vehicle, behind the front tires. 1. Locate the lifting point (B) on either side of your vehicle to jack the vehicle according to the illustration shown. 2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle. 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (A). 5-66 Lifting From the Rear V The rear lifting point can be accessed from the rear of the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side. 1. Locate the lifting point to jack your vehicle according to the illustration shown. 2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle. 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack spans at least two of the crossmember ribs. For more information, see Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4. 5-67 If a Tire Goes Flat Your Corvette has no spare tire, no tire changing equipment and no place to store a tire. It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. See “Tires” in the Index. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. If your vehicle has Extended Mobility Tires (EMT), you won’t need to stop on the side of the road to change a flat tire. EMT tires can operate effectively with no air pressure. If you drive on a deflated EMT for 50 miles (80 km) or less and at speeds of 55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that the tire can be repaired. Contact the nearest authorized Chevrolet or Goodyear EMT servicing facility, as soon as possible, to have the flat tire inspected and repaired or replaced. For more information, see “Extended Mobility Tires” in the Index. 5-68 Special tools and procedures are required to service an Extended Mobility Tire (EMT). If these special tools and procedures aren’t used you or others could be injured and your vehicle could be damaged. Always be sure the proper tools and procedures, as described in the service manual, are used. To order a service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. Z06 models do not have Extended Mobility Tires. If a Z06 model tire goes flat,avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then do this: 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. Put the shift lever (manual transmission) in REVERSE (R). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Inspect the flat tire. If the tire has been separated from the wheel or has damaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapid call a tire repair facility. See “Roadside air IOSS, Assistance” in the Index. If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may be used to repair the damaged tire temporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to at least 26 psi (179 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute the tire sealant. The tire pressure is checked after driving for a maximum of 10 minutes to see if the slow leak has been stopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) or more, inflate the tire up to the standard operating pressure as shown on the Tire Pressure Label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. See “Tires, Pressure” in the Index. You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only. For more information regarding the tire inflator kit see “Tire Inflator Kit” following this section. Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below 19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven further. Damage to the tire may be severe and the sealant will not be effective. Contact Roadside Assistance. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. 5-69 Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Only) Every Z06 model with P295/35ZR18 and P265/402Rl7 tires, when new, was equipped with a tire inflator kit. The repair kit contains a detailed instruction card that outlines step by step the temporary repair procedure. Be sure to read and follow all the tire inflator kit instructions. The kit also includes: A. Air Compressor B. Tire Sealant C. Sealant Filling Hose D. Air Compessor Accessory Plug E. Air Compressor Inflator Hose 5-70 F. Air Pressure Gage G. SealantFilling Hose Plug H. Valve Core Remover I. Spare Valve Core J. 55-mphLabel Tire Sealant The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected into a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannot repair tire damage caused while driving on a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” or a tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas. The tire sealant solution is a one-time use application for one tire only. Check the tire sealant expiration date; the sealant may not be as effective beyond the expiration date. The tire sealant can be peeled off easily after drying. Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with Extended Mobility Tires or tire pressure monitors. The tire sealant can damage tire pressure monitor sensors. See“Extended Mobility Tires” in the Index. Air Compressor The air compressor included in the tire inflator kit, was designed exclusively for the Z06 Model equipped with P295/35ZR18 and P265/40ZR17 tires. After the sealant has been injected into the flat tire, use the air compressor to inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (179 kPa). Instructions for connecting and using the air compressor are iocateci on the air Compressor. A. Inflating Hose B. Air Pressure Gage C. ON/OFF Switch D. Air Compressor Plug Notice: The car engine must be running to avoid draining the battery while running the air compressor. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 2-34. 5-71 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle with the engine running,if the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL (N) with the parking brake firmly set (manual transmission). Your vehicle can roll or move suddenly even when on fairly level ground. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to NEUTRAL (N) when you start or idle your engine. Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with the climate control system off can cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. 5-72 1 Inflating something too much canmake it explode, and you or others could be injured. Be sure to readthe inflator instructions, and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa). Notice: Do not allow the air compressor to operate continuously for more than six minutes to help prevent damage from overheating. Notice: If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure cannot be reached after six minutes the vehicle should not be driven further. Damage to the tire issevere and the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air compressor plug from the accessorypower outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. If 26 psi (1 79 kPa) tire pressure is reached in six minutes or less, disconnect the air compressor and attach the enclosed maximum speed label to the inside upper left corner of the windshield or to the face of the radio/clock. 1 The maximumspeed label reminds you to drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired. Tire Inflator KitStorage The tire inflator kit is stored in the rear hatch/trunk area of your vehicle. Repairheplace tire. Reparer ou remplacer le pneu. 0 Repararlsustituir el neumatico. Place the air compressor pump and accessories into the inflator kit case and store in the hatchhrunk compartment area of your vehicle. A' A E3 B 1. Remove the elastic cord (A) from around the vntninimm I G L U I I Ill 1 y hnnb I I"-,\ /a\u rrnrl n r \Y, I U clirln thn bit n11t frnm I I "lll UllUU L I I U I \ , %" U L under the elastic band (C) that is secured to the floor of the hatch/trunk area. 2. Unwrap the elastic cord (A) from around the handle of the tire inflator kit. Open the tire inflator kit case by lifting up the two tabs located on either side of the kit handle. 5-73 1. Loop the elastic cord (A) around the handle of the tire inflator kit. To Stow the Tire Inflatnr Kit: Stc,,,lg the tire inflator kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store the tire inflator kit in the proper place. I B A B A2. Insert the tire inflator kit under the elastic band (C) that is secured to the floor of the hatchkrunk area of your vehicle. 3. Wrap the elastic cord (A) around the retaining hook (B). 5-74 Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a match or get them ona hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use these to clean your vehicle: Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: 0 Alcohol 0 LaundrySoap 0 Bleach 0 ReducingAgents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Benzene Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth. 0 Naphtha FabricKarpet 0 Carbon Tetrachloride 0 Acetone Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Gasoline PaintThinner 0 Turpentine 0 LacquerThinner 0 Nail Polish Remover You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on paqe 5-82. They can all be hazardous - some more than others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 5-75 Leather Here are some cleaning tips: Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. Clean up stains as soon as you can they set. - before Carefully scrape off any excess stain. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. Coated Moldings These moldings are around the hatch opening in the rear area. When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft lint-free cloth dampened with water. When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water. 5-76 Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Interior Plastic Components Care of Safety Belts Useonlya mild Soap andwater solution ona soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish. Keep belts clean and d Security Shade and Convenience Net Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse with cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use chlorine bleach. Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See GM Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-82. Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the insiderear window, since they may have to be scrapedOff later- If abrasive cleaners --- -.--..I att; uacu -- +L- :--:A+Le WII LIIG III~IUG VI ~ n n ns s u n ..,;nAln,l, cIn W W ~ ~ ~ U V W W , UIB electricdefoggerelementmaybedamaged.Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. L - not bleach or dyesa. - -y belts. If you do, it may severely weakenthem. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent appiicaiion may be requirea. See Pari E; Eecuffui/e//&u’ Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 13. 5-77 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-82. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-82. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Notice: Conveyor systems on some automatic car washes may damage your vehicle. They may not have enough clearance for the undercarriage or for the wide rear tires. Check with the manager before using a car wash. If your vehicle has a “basecoatlclearcoat”paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish. Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Removable Roof Panel Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing and/or storing the roof panel. 0 Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. If you use a glass treatment or conditioner containing ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on your glass, be sure to remove the acrylic roof panel, if so equipped. These products may damage the panel. 0 0 Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry the panel. Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel for one minute, then wipe the panel with a soft, lint-free cloth. Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on roof panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top. These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the panel gets wet, you should dry it off. Notice: Do not use a glass treatment or conditioner containing ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on the roof panel. These products may damage the panel. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in tull-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. 5-79 Convertible Top Aluminum Wheels Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. When you hand washthe top, do it in partial shade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and soft a sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush can chafethe threads in the top fabric. Don’t use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Your dealer has a Convertible Top Cleaner and Water Repellent. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight. To protect the convertible top: * After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is completely dry before you lower it. Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish; it could leave streaks. If you decide to go through an automatic car wash, ask the manager if the equipment could damage your top. 5-80 Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Tires To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheelsof the vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish and tires. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials avaliable from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Magnesium Wheel Finish Titanium Exhaust System (Z06 Only) Time and high performance driving conditions can cause a color change in titanium exhaust system parts. This is normal for a titanium surface. Fiberglass Springs Notice: Improper paint repair or refinishing can cause corrosion damageto a magnesium wheel. See your dealer if a magnesium wheel needs paint repair or refinishing. Notice: Don’t use corrosive or acidic cleaning agents, engine degreasers, aluminum cleaning agents or other harsh solvents to clean fiberglass springs; they’ll damage the springs. Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage C?!? t2kn ?‘!e fcrmc; h!ctrhy, rinl;!Pt-chspPC! discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. +hr. &rnmnmh-, ,lA hn l n ~ c ~ n A , - hnfAm 4 hninn $IIi hnrl DIIUUIU uc I U U ~ G I I G U UGIUIG U G I I I Y ~ I U S I I G U . LIIG 11a11lc Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of ne\Iy \.lehic!ec: damaged by this fa!!nut condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. 5-8 1 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing the following products. Vinyl Cleaner I I I I Removes dirt, grime, smoke and finaertxints. Chrome and Wire Wheel Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and Cleaner wire wheel covers. I Removes dust, fingerprints, and surface Finish Enhancer contaminants, Spray on wbe off. Glass Cleaner 5-82 1 Usage Removes swirl marks, fine scratches and other light Swirl Remover Polish surface contamination. Removes light scratches Cleaner Wax and protects finish. Cleans, shines and Foaming Tire Shine Low protects in one easy step, Gloss no wiping necessary. Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Wash Wax Concentrate Biodegradable and phosphate free. Oforless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics, Odor Eliminator vinyl, leather, and carpet. Quick and easily removes spots and stains from Spot Lifter carpets, vinyl and cloth upholstery. Protects convertibletops Water Repellent from water leaks. Convertible Top Cleaner Cleans convertible tops. See your General Motors parts department for these products. See Pat? D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. 5 Vehicle Identification ervice Parts Id ntification Label Vehicle Identification Number (VlN) You’ll find this label located inside the glovebox. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: @ EI II 1111 @ III 111111111111111111111111 111111II111111111111111111111It bl SAMPLE4UX1M072675 bl @ @ yourVIN, the model designation, paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. e - ._r.*C.- --!-- I _I -x.- ._ Engine merlLIIIcauur1 ~ The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. 5-83 Electrical System Add-on Electrical Equipment Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-47. Accessory Power Plug The accessory power plug can be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB radio. It is located behind the carpeting, on the passenger’s side toe-board, at the top left corner near the body control module. Be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment. 5-84 To use the accessory power plug, do the following: 1, Remove the toe-board panel by pulling at the top of each corner of the panel. 2. Locate the black connector at the top left corner of the compartment near the body control module above the two white diagnostic connectors. 3. Disconnect the connector pigtail by pulling forward on the plastic locking tab and pull the connection apart from the wire harness. The plug has the following three separate wires: The orange wire connects to battery power. The yellow wire connects to ignition power. (Power is only available when the ignition is in ON.) The black wire connects to ground. Notice: When using the accessory power plug: e Headlamp Wiring Do NOT splice wires directly into the vehicle electrical wire harness. If done incorrectly, spicing may cause damage to your electrical system and would not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away. e The maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 15 amps. Windshield Wiper Fuses e Be sure to turnoff any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods of time can drain your battery. The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse and an internal circuit breaker. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. DO NOT use this plug if the electrical equipment requires frequent connecting and disconnecting. Power Windows and Other This may cause excessivewear on the accessory power plug and damage your Power Options electrical system and the damage would not be covered by your warranty. Circuit breakers protect the power seats and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is tlxed or goes away. 5-85 Fuses and Circuit 5reakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of maxi-fuses, mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without - like the radio or cigarette lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. 5-86 instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, under the instrument panel and under the toe-board. Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of the panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses. Fuse 1 r 2I 3 4 I 5 Usage Console Cigarette Lighter Monitored (Inadvertent) Load Control Lumbar Seat Driver Seat Control Module I Radio, Compact I Parking Lamps, Disc Player Taillamps I System and Inside Rearview ~~ I I , - " 23 I Bodv Control Module - Ignition 2 27 I HVAC Controls I I I I 5-87 p 47 ignition 1 Rear Defogger 40 I 1 I I I Starter Blank 5-88 41 42 I Left Daytime Running Lamp I Tonneau Release I Courtesy Lamps ~______ Automatic Lamp Control Parking 44 I Automatic Lamp Control Headlamps 45 46 ISpeakers Bose Defoaaer I Rear Q) C cn . I C W Anti-Lock Brakes, Selective Ride I I I I I I I 5-90 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Fog Lamp Blank I Headlamp Low-Beam Riaht " Headlamp High-Beam Right I Headlamp Low-Beam Left Horn Headlamp High-Beam Left I Fuel Pumr, Cooling Fan - Ignition 3 Oxygen Sensor Powertrain Control Module I Throttle Control I lniector 2 I Engine Ignition Blank Blank Injector 1 I I I I 1 I Spare I I I I Usage Powertrain Control Module Air Conditioning Blank Blank 26 I 28 29 30 31 32 46 I Spare I - Spare Spare Spare Cooling Fan 2 33 34 39 Air Pump Air Conditioner and Clutch 1 Fog Lamp I 41 Coolinq Fan 1 5-91 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Part Dr Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-73for more information. Capacities and Specifications Capacities Application I Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a I English 1.75 Ibs Metric I 0.79 kg I Automatic Transmission Drain and Refill I Overhaul 5.0 quarts 4.7 L 10.8 quarts 10.2 L ~~ I ~~~~~~ ~ ~~~ ~ Cooling System 11.9 12.6 quarts L Engine Oil with Filter 6.5 quarts 18.0 gallons 6.1 L Fuel Tank Manual Transmission (Overhaul) Wheel Nut Torque I 4.1 quarts 100 Ibft I 68.0 L 3.8 L 140 Nom All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after.filling 5-92 I Engine Specifications - I Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap [ Firing Order 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3 LS6 V8 S Manual 0.060inch (1.524 mm) 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3 Engine Data Engine LS1 Automatic Transmission Horsepower 350 605200 rpm 7 T I Torque 360@ 4000 rpm 350605200 rpm Transmission ~~~~~ ~ Displacement 5.7 L Compression Ratio 5.7 L 10.1:l 5.7 L 10.W 10.1:l 375@4400rpm ~ LS6 405 606000 rpm 400 604800 rpm 5-93 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Number Part A91 7C* Enqine Air CleanedFilter PF44* Engine Oil Filter PCV Valve CV948C* Spark Plug 41-974* Windshield Wiper Blade I Length I I I * ACDelco@part number. 5-94 22 inches (55.9 cm) 9 mm x 3 mm Shepherd’s Hook Engine Accessory Drive Belt Routing 5-95 Section 6 Maintenance Schedul Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6-2 introduction ................................................... 6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2 Maintenance Requirements .............................. 6-2 How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4 Using Your Maintenance Schedule .................... 6-4 Scheduled Maintenance ................................... 6-4 Part B: Owner Checks and Services .................6-7 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................ 6-7 At Least Once a Month ................................... 6-7 At Least Twice a Year ................................ 6-8 At Least Once a Year ................................. 6.8 Part C: Periodic Maintenance inspections .........6.11 Steering and Suspension inspection ................6.11 Tire and Wheel Inspection ............................. 6-11 Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6-11 Fuel System inspection .................................. 6-12 Engine Cooling System Inspection ................... 6-12 Rear Axle Service ......................................... 6-12 Brake System Inspection ................................ 6-12 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-13 Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6-15 6- 1 Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the Introduction environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can I even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper IMPORTANT: fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase KEEP ENGINE OIL the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect AT THE PROF our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good LEVEL AND CHAluut condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. RECOMMENDED I . . .. . . . . . . ,. , ? , Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details. 6-2 How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service centerdo these jobs. “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform. I Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for thejob. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the workyourself or have itdone. “Part: E: Maintenance Recsrd” is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle forwarranty repairs. If you want to get the service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-IO. 6-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services This part contains engine oil scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life system and how it indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance services which are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified. Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. Because of the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer. This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts. 6-4 The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. This schedule is for vehicles that: carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these on your vehicle’s Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33. are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles (1 66 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle. See Part B: Owner Checks and Serviceson page 6-7, Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6-1 I and Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 13. Footnotes t The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air ResourcesBoard has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emissions warranty orlimit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the Engine Oil Life System@(orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first). Reset the system. Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can varv considerablv. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come on. Change your oii as soon as possibie within the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for information on resetting the system. Use engine oil meeting the GM Standard GM4718M. After the services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service on the maintenance record pages in part E of this schedule. An Emission Control Service. 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.) 35,505iir'iiies (50 006 kmj Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) inspect engine air (=jeanerfiiter if )/OU are &i-viry il dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.) 6-5 50,000 Miles (83000 km) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - Uses such as high performance operation. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km). Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) * Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 6-6 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) * Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. * Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - Uses such as high performance operation. If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t required change. 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) Drain, flush and refill the cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant on page5-23 for what to use. An Emission Control Service. * Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. Part B: Owner Checks and Services Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D. At Least Once a Month At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Engine Qil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further -1 - I- .I - Ut5LdllS. Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See Tires on page 5-54 for further details. Cassette Tape Player Service Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio Systern(s) on page 3-62 for further details. Power Antenna Service Clean power antenna mast. See Audio Systern(s) on page 3-62 for further details. Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant un pay.e 5-23 for- fui’ii-,er 6-7 At Least Twice a Year Manual Transmission Check Restraint System Check Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See Manual Transmission Fluid on page 5-20. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed. Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-78. Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. 6-8 Automatic Transmission Check It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A loss. transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid Check forleaks. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to your dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible. At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D. Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear compartment, console door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check en yo-. are dc ...g tl..- check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-30 if necessary. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way +.LU-. +LA 41--" LIIG IIUUI. ,-.+.--.rCr." ... I 4 +L.=."I,,-. I I L I I G ~ L ~ I L G vI v u 1 n 3 . .,L.-...+I-.=. V V I IGII LIIG mI..+-L 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-30 if necessary. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position, h n t t V U L A n n 7 + e t r , r t thn n n n i n m UVI I c QLUI L GI Ieuule. yuul udlly TIL ! - ! - - l~ ~ _I -- I I lib II IGIuUes I3 Uilt: way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership. 7-7 Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, yourdealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of $30.00 per daysupported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state,local and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair. Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as P courtesy rental. 7-8 Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact you dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details. General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors. If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors. Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K I A ON5 Reporting Safety Defects to General NlOtQrS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write: NHTSA, U S . Department of Transportation ‘!&!iRc$E-?, P.C. 2Q599 Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center F.6. Eox 3 3 i u Detroit, MI 48232-5170 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline. In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 7-9 Service Publications Ordering Information In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and Warranty Booklet. Service Manuals Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $60.00 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00 Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Current and Past Model Order Forms RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00 Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle. Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). Owner’s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models. 7-10 ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551 -41 23 Monday - Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helrninc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P. 0. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. A AccessoryPowerOutlets ................................. Accessory Power Plug ..................................... Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................ Active Handling System ................................... Active Handling System Light ........................... AddingWasher Fluid ....................................... AdditionalProgram Information ........................... Additives, Fuel ................................................. Add-on Electrical Equipment ............................ AdjustingtheSpeakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-65, Air Bag Off Light ..................................................... ReadinessLight .......................................... AirBagSystem .............................................. Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .................................... WhenShouldanAirBag Inflate? ................... Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. AirCompressor .............................................. Air Dam, Front ............................................... All I nnqtinnc vvGlaGua Luwxuuxm ...................................... AluminumWheels ........................................... AM ............................................................... rill r \ \ l n Y p n q c 3-20 5-84 3-75 4-10 3-37 5-36 7-8 5-6 5-84 3-69 3-32 3-32 1-39 1-44 1-42 1-47 1-42 1-43 1-42 1-40 5-18 5-71 2-19 7-4 5-80 3-77 Antenna. Fixed Mast ........ .................... 3-78 Antenna,PowerMastCare ........................... 3-79 Antennas, Integrated Windshield and Rear Window ...................................................... 3-79 Anti-lock BrakeSystem(ABS) ............................ 4-7 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-36 5-75 Appearance Care ............................................ Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-77 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-81 Cleaning the Inside ofYour Vehicle ................ 5-75 Cleaning the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............. 5-78 Fiberglass Springs ........................... ..... 5-81 5-81 Finish Damage ............................................ GMVehicleCare/Appearance Materials .......... 5-82 Titanium Exhaust System .............................. 5-81 UnderbodyMaintenance ............................... 5-81 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-77 ArmingtheSystem ......................................... 2-16 Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-21 3-62 Audio System(s) ............................................. Audio Systems Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-77 Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78 Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-78 3-78 Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... integrated Windshield and Rear Window 3-79 Antennas ................................................ h7- ...-- A-4-.-.-kA-- 1 n7n r u v v w B I I L ~ III ICI I V I C I ~ L ~ C I I C............................ a - / ~ Radio with Cassette ..................................... 3-63 3-67 Radio with CD ............................................ Audio Systems (cont.) Setting the Time .......................................... Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ Trunk-Mounted CD Changer .......................... Understanding Radio Reception ..................... Automatic Transmission ................................... Fluid .......................................................... Operation ................................................... Automatic Transmission Check ........................... Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control SystemCheck .............................................. 3-62 3-75 3-70 3-77 2-21 5-20 2-24 6-8 6-9 B Battery ................................. ................. Battery Replacement ......................................... Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... Body Lubrication Service ................................... Brake Parking ...................................................... System Inspection ....................................... SystemWarning Light .................................. Brake Fluid .................................................... BrakeWear ................................................... Brakes .......................................................... Braking ........................................................... Braking in Emergencies ..................................... Break-In, NewVehicle ..................................... Bulb Replacement ........................................... 2 5-40 2-8 3-17 4-24 6-8 2-30 6-12 3-35 5-37 5-39 5-37 4-6 4-8 2-19 5-47 Bulb Replacement (cont.) Back-up Lamps ........................................... Halogen Bulbs ............................................ Headlamps ................................................. Replacement Bulbs ...................................... TaillampsandTurnSignalLamps .................. Buying NewTires ........................................... 5-51 5-47 5-47 5-51 5-49 5-59 C California Fuel ...... ........ ................ 5-6 Canada ................................... ......., ..... 7-4 Canadian Owners ............................................ ii Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7 Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-92 CarbonMonoxide ........................... 4-27,4-35,4-35 Care of Safety Belts ...... ........... ............... 5-77 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............................... 3-77 CD Player .................................................. 3-78 CDS .......................................................... 3-78 Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-42 Cassette TapeMessages ................................. 3-66 Cassette Tape Player Service ............................. 6-7 CDAdapter Kits ............................................. 3-66 CDChanger,Trunk-Mounted ............................ 3-70 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-39 Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-64 Check EngineLight ............................................... GagesWarningLight ................................... Check Engine Light ......................................... Checking Coolant ............................................ Checking Engine Oil ........................................ Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... ChildRestraints Child RestraintSystems ............................... Infantsand Young Children ........................... Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) .......................... Older Children ............................................. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCHSystem ........................................ Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat Position ........................................... Top Strap ................................................... Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ Cigarette Lighter .......................................... Cleaning Fiberglass Springs ....................................... Inside of YourVehicle .................................. Outside ofYour Vehicle ................................ Titanium Exhaust System .............................. I lnrlnrhnrltr htl-intnnqnpn uuuy ............................... Weatherstrips .............................................. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... u t IUGI I V l U l l l L G t lUt t b G 3-38 3-42 3-38 5-25 5-13 5-10 1-48 5-81 1-26 1-23 1-31 1-21 1-33 1-34 1-30 1-31 3-21 5-81 5-75 5-78 5-81 E-0 4 uI LI 5-77 5-78 Climate Control Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-22 Climate Control System 3-28 Outlet Adjustment .................................... Clutch. Hydraulic ............................................. 5-22 Coated Moldings .............................................5-76 Compact Disc Messages .......................... 3.70. 3-74 Competitive Driving Mode ................................ 4-11 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5 ConvenienceNet ............................................ 2-42 Convertible Top ...................................... 2.49. 2-80 Lowering the Convertible Top ........................ 2-50 2-53 Raising the Convertible Top .......................... Coolant EngineTemperatureGage ............................ 3-38 2-23 Heater.Engine ............................................ Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26 Cooling System .............................................. 5-29 Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-16 Cruise Control .................................................. 3-9 Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-39 Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-10 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation .............................. 7-7 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 7-3 (TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... P.. c n + . n 4 r r . +.** D"*- . A. . 7 n uu3tuI I IGI ~ ~ L I ~ I ~ LI L r IV ULI G ~ UtI: ..................... / -L GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities ................................................ 7-5 n+rrmrrr "A Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government .............................................. 7-9 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government .............................................. 7-9 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5 Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10 D DaytimeRunningLamps .................................. 3-13 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2 3-27 Defogging and Defrosting ................................. Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................. 3-76 Disarming the System ..................................... 2-17 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 Door ............ 2-9 Locks ....................................... Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10 Downshifting (Manual Transmission) .................. 2-29 Driver Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-13 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-44 DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-45 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-53 Other Messages .......................................... 3-61 Driving At Night ..................................................... 4-18 City ........................................................... 4-22 4 Driving (cont.) Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Drunken ....................................................... 4-2 Freeway ..................................................... 4-23 Hill andMountainRoads .............................. 4-25 In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-19 Winter ........................................................ 4-27 Driving On Snow or Ice ................................... 4-28 Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-21 Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-21 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-22 E Electrical System AccessoryPowerPlug ................................. 5-84 Add-on Equipment ...................................... 5-84 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-86 Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-85 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-85 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-85 Emergency Trunk Release Handle 2-13 (Convertible Only) .................................... Emissions Inspection and .............. ... 3-40 Maintenance Programs Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..................................... 5-18 Battery ....................................................... 5-40 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-38 Coolant ...................................................... 5-23 Engine (cont.) ................... 2-23 Coolant Heater .................. Coolant TemperatureGage ........................... 3-38 Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-12 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12 Exhaust ..................................................... 2-35 Oil ............................................................. 5-13 Oil Pressure Gage ....................................... 3-41 Overheating ................................................ 5-26 Starting ...................................................... 2-21 Engine Accessory Drive Belt Routing ................. 5-95 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Replacement ............ 5-19 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ........... .... 5-89 Engine Coolant Level Check .......................... 6-7 Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16 Engine Oil Level Check ..................................... 6-7 Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance ..................... 6-5 ExiVEntry Lighting ........................................... 3-1 6 Express-Down Window .................................... 2-1 5 Extended Mobility Tires .................................... 5-54 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-20 Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12 F FabricKarpet ................................................. Filter Engine Air Cieaner ...................................... Finding aStation .................................... 3.63. Finish Care .................................................... 5-75 5-18 3-67 5-78 Finish Damage ............................................... 5-81 Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 3-78 Flash-to-Pass .......................... ... 3-7 Flat Tire ..................................................... 5-68 Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-40 Fluid Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-20 Manual Transmission .................................... 5-20 Power Steering ........................................... 5-35 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36 FM ............................................................... 3-77 FogLamps .................................................... 3-14 Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5 Front Air Dam ................................................ 2-19 Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Additives ...................................................... 5-6 California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9 Filling YourTank ........................................... 5-7 i=ueis in Foreign bJ-liries .............................. 5-6 Gage ......................................................... 3-42 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5 System Inspection ....................................... 6-12 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 5-86 Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-85 G Gage Check Gages Warning Light .......................... Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... Fuel .......................................................... Speedometer .............................................. Tachometer ................................................. VoltmeterGage ........................................... Gasoline Octane ........................................................ Specifications ............................................... Glass Surfaces ............................................... GloveBox ..................................................... GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities .................................................... Hatchnrunk ................................................... Hatchnrunk Lid Release .................................. Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger .................... HeadlampWiring ............................................ Headlamps .................................................... Bulb Replacement ....................................... Halogen Bulbs ............................................ Headlamps Doors ........................................... HeadlampsonReminder ................................... 6 3-42 3-38 3-41 3-42 3-31 3-31 3-34 5-5 5-5 5-77 2-39 7-5 2-1 1 2-12 3-4 3-7 5-85 5-47 5-47 5-47 3-12 3-7 Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-17 Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-25 Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-25 Hood 5-10 Checking Things Under ............................ Release ................................................. 5-11 Horn ............................................................... 3-5 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank .............................. ................. 5-31 How to Add Fluid ......................... ................. 5-22 How to Check ............................. ... 5.20. 5.21. 5-56 How to Check and Add Fluid ......... ................. 5-23 How to Check Lubricant ................ ................. 5-46 How to Check Power Steering Fluid ................. 5-35 How to Remove and Replace the ................. 2-40 Floor Mats ............................... How to Use This Manual .............. ......................... ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................. 1-12 Hydraulic Clutch .......................... ................. 5-22 Hydroplaning ............................... ................. 4-21 I If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ................................................ 5-28 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27 If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-39 If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-39 If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-32 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ........................... 4-30 Ignition Automatic Transmission ...................... . . . . . . . . 6-10 Check Lock Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-23 Inflation -- TirePressure .................................. 5-56 Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-70 Inspection 6-12 BrakeSystem ............................................. Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-12 Exhaust System .......................................... 6-1 1 FuelSystem ............................................... 6-12 Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-1 1 Steering and Suspension .............................. 6-11 Tire and Wheel ........................................... 6-11 Installing the RoofPanel .................................. 2-47 Instrument Panel 3-30 Cluster ....................................................... Overview ..................................................... 3-2 Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-86 !!?%gr&:c! '!!iKdShlS!d 3Kd !?ez ?!iRde J?: Antennas ................................................ 3-79 Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15 Interior Plastic Components .............................. 5-77 L Lamps Exterior ...................................................... Interior ....................................................... Lap Belt Cinch Feature .................................... Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... LATCHSystem Child Restraints ........................................... Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCHSystem ..................................... Latches, Seatback ............................................ Leather ......................................................... Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running . 5-41 -...-- .............................. Lifting From the Front ...................................... Lifting From the Rear ...................................... 1A -r.n".- \ n u L u l II U L l b \ I I Ul I J I I 1 1 3 3 1 U I I ) 3-12 3-15 1-14 1-13 1-31 1-33 1-5 5-76 2-10 A AA 6-46 5-66 5-67 5-64 Lifting Your Corvette, Tires ............................... Light 3-37 Active Handling System ................................ Air Bag urr ................................................. 3-32 Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-32 Anti-Lock BrakeSystemWarning ................... 3-36 - Jump Starting ................................................. 6-8 2-4 2-3 Key Lock Cylinders Service ................................ Keyless Entry System ....................................... Keys ............................................................... rc . Light (cont.) BrakeSystemWarning ................................. CheckGagesWarning ................................. Malfunction Indicator .................................... Safety BeltReminder ................................... Security ..................................................... TCSWarning Light ...................................... Traction Control System(TCS)Warning .......... Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................... Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... Lockout Protection .......................................... Locks Door ........................................................... Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... Lockout Protection ....................................... Power Door ................................................ Loss of Control ............................................... Lowering the Convertible Top ............................ 3-35 3-42 3-38 3-31 3-42 3-36 3-36 2-15 4-1 1 4-33 2-10 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-10 4-17 2-50 MagnesiumWheel Finish ................................. 5-81 Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering ............ 4-13 Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-94 Maintenance Schedule AtEach Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-7 At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-7 At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-8 6-8 At Least TwiceaYear ................................... 8 Maintenance Schedule (cont.) BrakeSystem inspection .............................. 6-12 Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-12 6-11 ExhaustSystem Inspection ........................... Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-12 How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3 Introduction .................................................. 6-2 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4 Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............... 6-7 Part C - Periodic MaintenanceInspections ...... 6-11 Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .............................. ... 6-13 Part E - Maintenance Record ............. ... 6-15 Rear Axle Service .................................... 6-12 ScheduledMaintenance ................................. 6-4 Steering andSuspension Inspection ............... 6-11 Tire and Wheel Inspection ............................ 6-11 Using Your ................................................... 6-4 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-38 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2 Manual Transmission ....................................... 2-21 Fluid ........................................... ....... 5-20 Operation ................................................... 2-27 6-8 Manual Transmission Check ............................... Matching Transmitterts) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-7 Memory ......................................................... 2-55 Message .... 3-53 DIC Warnings and Messages ......... Mexico. Central America and Caribbean Islands/ Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U S. Virgin Islands) ....................................................... 7-4 Mirrors 2-37 AutomaticDimmingRearview ........................ Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-38 OutsideConvexMirror ................................. 2-38 2-38 Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... ModelReference ................................................ vi Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28 Outside 2-38 Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38 PowerHeated Mirrors .................................. 2-38 OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode .......................................... 5-26 Owners,Canadian ............................................... ii Owner's Information ........................................ 7-10 P NewVehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19 NormalMaintenanceReplacement Parts ............ 5-94 0 Odometer ...................................................... Off-Road Recovery .......................................... Oil Ennine a.. . - ....................................................... Engine Oil PressureGage ............................ Older Children, Restraints ................................ One to Four Shift Light (Manual Transmission) .................................. Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer with thz AI?I-FM Radio with Cassette .................... Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer with the AM-FM Radio with CD ............................ 3-31 4-15 5-13 3-41 1-21 2-29 '1-73 L r)-t 3-73 Park (P) Shifting Out of ..................... .... Parking Brake ........................................................ Over Things That Burn ................................. Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................... Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-33 2-30 2-34 6-10 2-34 P?!-k(P) Shifting Into ................................................ 2-31 Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4 Part E3 - Owner Checks and Services .................. 6-7 Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-11 Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-13 P2rt E - Mainten2nce Recerc! ........................... 6-15 Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....................... 1-20 Passing ......................................................... 4-15 9 PASS-Key@.................................................... Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. Playing a Compact Disc ................................... Playing the Radio ................................... 3-63, Power Accessory Outlets ........................................ Antenna Mast Care ...................................... Door Locks ................................................. Electrical System ......................................... Seat ............................................................ Steering Fluid ............................................. Windows .................................................... Power Antenna Service ..................................... Power Steering ............................................... Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 3-20 3-79 2-10 5-85 1-2 5-35 2-15 6-7 4-13 .. 1-11 Racing or Other Competitive Driving .................. Radios .......................................................... Care ofYour Cassette Tape Player ................ Care of Your CD Player ............................... Care ofYour CDs ........................................ Radio with Cassette ..................................... Radio with CD ............................................ Setting the Time .......................................... 10 2-17 7-7 3-65 3-69 3-67 2-22 3-62 3-77 3-78 3-78 3-63 3-67 3-62 Radios (cont.) Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-75 Trunk-Mounted CD Changer .......................... 3-70 Understanding Reception .............................. 3-77 Raising the Convertible Top .............................. 2-53 ReadingLamps .............................................. 3-16 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-46 Limited-Slip ................................................. 4-11 Service ...................................................... 6-12 2-41 Rear Storage Area .......................................... Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-27 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-37 Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3 4-33 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System,Operation ............ 2-5 RemovableRoof Panel .................................... 5-79 Removing the RoofPanel ................................ 2-43 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-51 Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-40 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash .............................................. 1-48 Reporting Safety Defects 7-9 CanadianGovernment ................................... General Motors ............................................. 7-9 7-9 United States Government .............................. 6-8 Restraint System Check .................................... Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-48 Restraint System Check (cont.) Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ..................................................... 1-48 Restraint Systems 1-48 Checking .................................................... Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-48 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21 Roadside Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5 Rocking YourVehicle To Get It Out ........ .... 4-32 Panel Roof ................................. .... 2-43 Installing the Roof Panel ........................... 2-47 Removing the Roof Panel ............................. 2-43 Storing the Roof Panel ................................. 2-46 Running Your Engine While YouAre Parked ....... 2-36 Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................................ 3-3 1 Safety Belts 5-77 C9.t-P nf Driver Position ............................................ 1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-12 Passenger Position ...................................... 1-20 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-11 Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-20 C q f n t \ r Rnlt I I r n n l l r i n n D r n n n Q n p \ r 1-20 ly Icy1 Iby ................. WulGLy Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... . 1-7 ... ... I l l Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................... . . . . . . . . . . U G I L WiJG UUlll I IC41 Scheduled Maintenance ............ .............. 6-4 Seatback Latches ........................ . . . . . . . 1-5 Seats Manual ........................................................ 1-2 Power Seats ................................................. 1-2 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3 1-5 Seatback Latches .......................................... Sport Seat ................................................... 1-6 Securing a Child Restraint ... ......... 1-33 Designed for the LATCH System Passenger Seat Position ............... ......... 1-34 Security Light .............................................. 3-42 Security Shade and Convenience Net ................5-77 Selective Ride Control ..................................... 4-12 Sensors ......................................................... 3-26 5-3 Service ........................................................... Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-38 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10 Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-10 Service Manuals ............................................. 7-10 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ............ 1-47 Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-64, 3-68 Setting the Time ............................................. 3-62 Setting the Tone (Bassnreble) .................. 3-64, 3-68 Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission) 2-28 Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-31 Shifting Out of Park (P) ...................................2-33 11 Skidding ........................................................ 4-1 7 Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-21 Specifications. Capacities ................................. 5-92 Speedometer .................................................. 3-31 Sport Seat ....................................................... 1-6 Starter Interlock Feature .................................. 2-22 Starter Switch Check ........................................ 6-9 Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21 Steering ........................................................ 4-1 3 Steering and Suspension Inspection .................. 6-1 1 Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-14 Steering Tips .................................................. 4-1 3 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-39 Convenience Net ......................................... 2-42 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-39 GloveBox .................................................. 2-39 Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-41 Storing the Roof Panel .................................... 2-46 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-32 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15 Tachometer .................................................... Taillamps Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... TCS Warning Light .......................................... Telescopic Steering .Column ............................... Testing the Alarm ............................................ 12 3-31 5-49 3-36 3-5 2-17 Theft.Deterrent. Radio ..................................... 3-75 Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-16 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16 PASS-Key@................................................. 2-17 Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5 6-7 Tire Inflation Check ........................................... Tire Inflator Kit Storage .................................... 5-73 Tire Sealant ................................................... 5-71 Tires ..................................................... 5-54, 5-80 Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-59 Chains ....................................................... 5-64 Extended Mobility ........................................ 5-54 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-68 Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-56 5-64 Lifting Your Corvette .................................... Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-57 Rotation ..................................................... 5-58 Tire and WheelInspection ............................ 6-11 Tire Inflator Kit ............................................ 5-70 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-60 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-61 Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-61 To Use The Engine Coolant Heater ................... 2-23 Topof the Instrument Panel ............................. 5-76 Top Strap ...................................................... 1-30 Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-31 ............... 2-33 TorqueLock(AutomaticTransmission) Towing Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-33 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-35 Towing (cont.) Your Vehicle ............................................... Traction Active Handling System ................................ Control System (TCS) .................................... ....................... ControlSystemWarningLight Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................. Selective Ride Control .................................. Transmission Fluid. Automatic ........................................... Fluid.Manual .............................................. TransmissionOperation,Automatic .................... Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ TransportationOptions ...................................... TrunWHatch ................................................... Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals .......................... TurnSignal/MuItifunctionLever ........................... Twilight Sentinel@ (Optional in UnitedStates,Standard inCanada) ................................................. v 4-33 4-10 4-9 3-36 4-1 1 4-12 5-20 5-20 2-24 2-27 7-7 2-1 1 3-6 3-6 Vehicle Control ........................................................ Damage Warnings ........................................... Loading ...................................................... Parking Your ............................................... Symbols ......................................................... Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................. ServiceParts Identification Label ................... Vehicle Personalization Memory ..................................................... VehicleStorage .............................................. Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... Visors ........................................................... Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 4-5 iv 4-33 2-34 iv 5-83 5-83 2-55 5-40 3-28 2-15 3-34 3-14 WarningLights. Gages and Indicators ................ 3-29 Warninss Underbody Flushing Service ............................. UnderstandingRadioReception ........................ ............................ UniformTireQualityGrading United States ................................................... Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss ................................................ 6-10 3-77 5-60 7-4 3-76 DICWarnings and Messages ........................ 3-53 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4 OtherWarning Devices .................................. 3-4 iii Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv Vehicle Damage .............................................. ‘!2shing Y9ur ‘Jehicle ...................................... 6-8 WeatherstripLubrication .................................... What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14 v 13 What to Do with Used Oil ................................ What to Use .......................... 5.24. 5.35. 5.36. Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... Replacement ............................................... When to Add Engine Oil .............................. When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil Life SystemTM) ................................ When to Check ...................................... 5-20, When to Check and What to Use ..................... When to Check Lubricant ................................. When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................ Why Safety BeltsWork ..................................... Windows ....................................................... Power .... , ................................................ 5-17 5-46 5-61 5-61 5-14 5-16 5-56 5-22 5-46 5-35 1-8 2-14 2-15 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................... 5-79 Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-8 Fluid .......................................................... 5-36 Windshield Washer Fluid LevelCheck ................. 6-7 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-52 Fuses ........................................................ 5-85 Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-27 Wiper Blade Check ........................................... 6-8 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2